DIGIFUSION FRT 101T Owner`s manual

 Graphical User Interface
Use this manual in combination with the
operating guide displayed on the GUI screen.
GUI Menu Operation (vpage 24)
GUI Menu Map (vpage 25)
Language (vpage 44)
Remote Control Unit Operations (vpage 77)
AV SURROUND PRE-AMPLIFIER
AVP-A1HDCI
Owner’s Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
nSAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read
before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be
retained for future reference.
3. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating
instructions should be adhered to.
4. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be
followed.
5. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product
manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example,
near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement;
or near a swimming pool; and the like.
8. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child
or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with
the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the
manufacturer.
9. A product and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation
and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from
overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa,
rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided
or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of
power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type
of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power
company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized
alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the
plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
FIGURE A
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL
ELECTRICAL CODE
"/5&//"
-&"%*/
8*3&
(306/%
$-".1
"/5&//"
%*4$)"3(&6/*5
/&$4&$5*0/
&-&$53*$
4&37*$&
&26*1.&/5
(306/%*/($0/%6$5034
/&$4&$5*0/
(306/%$-".14
108&34&37*$&(306/%*/(
&-&$530%&4:45&.
/&$/"5*0/"-&-&$53*$"-$0%& /&$"351"35)
I
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they
are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against
them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the product.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is
connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting
structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size
of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See
Figure A.
16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm,
or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it
from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the
vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or
where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral
convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out
parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the product.
20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or
removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet
and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
a)When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b)If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
d)If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to
restore the product to its normal operation,
e)If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and
f)When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this
indicates a need for service.
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the
service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer
or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,
ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the
product is in proper operating condition.
24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or
ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
25.Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
FCC Information (For US customers)
nNOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV Surround Pre-Amplifier
Model Number: AVP-A1HDCI
This product contains FCC ID: BV2- MPGBR052.
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC
100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, NJ 07430-2041
Tel. 201-762-6500 (Main)
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
3. CAUTION
•To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, separation distance of at least 20 cm must be
maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons.
•This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
4. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water,
and dust.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau
et la poussière.
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans
l’appareil.
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when
installed in a rack.
• Eviter des températures élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur
suffisante lors de l’installation sur une
étagère.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and
thinner come in contact with the unit.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the • Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides,
du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
unit for long periods of time.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation
lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant
de longues périodes.
IC Information (For Canadian customers)
1. PRODUCT
This product contains IC 6963A-MPGBR052.
This product complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
APPAREIL
Cet appareil contiens IC 6963A- MPGBR052.
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement
aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être
prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du
cordon.
* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in
any way.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil
d’une manière ou d’une autre.
2. CAUTION
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.
ATTENTION
Afin de réduire le risque d’interférence aux autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de façon à
ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas supérieure au niveau requis pour l’obtention
d’une communication satisfaisante.
II
Contents
Getting Started
Accessories······················································································3
Cautions on Handling······································································3
Cautions on Installation··································································3
About the Remote Control Unit·····················································3
Inserting the Batteries································································3, 4
Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit·································4
Part Names and Functions·····························································4
Front Panel··················································································4, 5
Display····························································································5
Rear Panel·······················································································6
Remote Control Unit·······································································7
Connections
Preparations·····················································································8
Cables Used for Connections·························································8
Video Conversion Function·····························································9
Speaker Layout ············································································10
Connecting to the Power Amp·····················································10
POA-A1HDCI Connection and Operation······························10 ~ 12
Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors····················12, 13
Connecting the Monitor································································13
Connecting the Playback Components·······································13
DVD Player····················································································13
Record Player················································································14
CD Player······················································································14
iPod®· ···························································································14
TV/CABLE Tuner···········································································15
Satellite Receiver··········································································15
Connecting the Recording Components·····································16
Digital Video Recorder··································································16
Video Cassette Recorder······························································17
CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck·····································17
Connections to Other Devices······················································18
Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector···············18
Video Camera / Game Console·····················································18
Component with Multi-channel Output connectors······················18
USB Port·······················································································19
XM Connector··············································································· 19
Antenna terminals · ······································································20
Network Audio··············································································21
Multi Zone·····················································································22
External Controller········································································23
Connecting the Power Cord·························································23
Once Connections are Completed···············································23
GUI Menu Operations
Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title·····················24
Example of Display of Default Values·········································24
Examples of GUI Screen Displays················································24
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)············································24
Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup)···························24
Cursor Position Display·································································24
Operations······················································································24
GUI Menu Map···············································································25
Auto Setup
Preparations···················································································26
Auto Setup·····················································································26
a Auto Setup·········································································26, 27
Error Messages·······································································28
s Option······················································································28
d Parameter Check·····································································28
Manual Setup
Speaker Setup···············································································29
a Speaker Configuration·····························································29
s Subwoofer Setup·····································································29
d Distance···················································································30
f Channel Level··········································································30
g Crossover Frequency·························································30, 31
h THX Audio Setup·····································································31
j Surround Speaker····································································31
HDMI Setup····················································································32
a Color Space··············································································32
s RGB Range··············································································32
d Auto Lip Sync···········································································32
f Audio························································································32
g Monitor Out·············································································32
h HDMI Control···········································································32
Audio Setup···················································································33
a EXT. IN Setup··········································································33
s 2ch Direct/Stereo·····································································33
d Downmix Option······································································34
f Auto Surround Mode·······························································34
g Manual EQ···············································································34
Network Setup··············································································35
a Network Setup·································································35 ~ 38
s Other························································································38
d Network Information································································38
Zone Setup·····················································································39
a ZONE2·····················································································39
s ZONE3·····················································································39
d OSD·························································································39
Option Setup··················································································40
a Pre-out Assign·········································································40
s XLR Out Polarity······································································41
d POA Setting·············································································41
f Volume Control········································································41
g Source Delete··········································································41
h GUI·····················································································41, 42
j Quick Select Name··································································42
k Trigger Out 1············································································42
l Trigger Out 2············································································42
A0 Trigger Out 3············································································42
A1 Trigger Out 4············································································42
A2 Transducer Setup·····································································42
A3 Digital Out················································································43
A4 Remote ID···············································································43
A5 2Way Remote··········································································43
A6 Dimmer····················································································43
A7 Setup Lock···············································································43
A8 Maintenance Mode··································································43
A9 Firmware Update·····································································43
S0 Add New Feature·····································································44
Language························································································44
Source Select
Input Source Selection··································································45
Settings Related to Playing Input Sources···························45, 46
a Play··························································································46
s Auto Preset··············································································46
d Preset Skip···············································································46
f Preset Name············································································46
g Video··················································································46, 47
h Input Mode··············································································47
j Rename···················································································47
k Source Level············································································47
l Input Att.··················································································48
A0 Playback Mode (iPod)······························································48
A1 Assign················································································48, 49
A2 Playback Mode········································································49
A3 Still Picture···············································································49
A4 Antenna Aiming·······································································49
Surround Mode
HOME THX CINEMA······································································50
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources······································50
Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)··············50
Standard Playback·········································································50
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources······································50
Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)··············51
Dolby Headphone·········································································51
DSP Simulation Playback·····························································51
Stereo Playback·············································································51
Direct Playback··············································································52
Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode············································52
Parameter
Audio······························································································52
a Surround Parameters·······················································52 ~ 54
s Tone···················································································54, 55
d Room EQ·················································································55
f Dynamic EQ·············································································55
g RESTORER··············································································55
h Night Mode··············································································55
j Audio Delay··············································································56
Picture Adjust················································································56
a Contrast···················································································56
s Brightness················································································56
d Chroma Level···········································································56
f Hue··························································································56
g DNR·························································································56
h Enhancer··················································································56
j Sharpness················································································56
Information
Status·····························································································56
a MAIN ZONE·············································································56
s ZONE2/3/4···············································································56
Audio Input Signal·········································································57
HDMI Information··········································································57
a Signal Information····································································57
s Monitor1··················································································57
d Monitor2··················································································57
Auto Surround Mode····································································57
Quick Select···················································································57
Preset Station················································································57
Playback
Preparations···················································································58
Turning the Power On···································································58
Operations During Playback··························································58
Playing Video and Audio Equipment···········································58
Basic Operation·············································································58
Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts··················································59
Basic Operation·············································································59
Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)··································59
Listening to Preset Stations····················································59, 60
RDS (Radio Data System)·····························································60
RDS Search···················································································60
PTY Search····················································································60
TP Search······················································································61
RT (Radio Text)··············································································61
Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs··································61
Basic Operation·············································································62
Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID····························62
Searching Categories····································································62
Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly········································62
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations················································63
Basic Operation·············································································63
Selecting Audio Programs·····························································64
Check the HD Radio Reception Information·································64
iPod® Playback··············································································64
Basic Operation·············································································64
Listening to Music········································································65
Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod·································65
Playing Network Audio,
USB Memory Devices or Rhapsody·············································66
Basic Operation·············································································67
Listening to Internet Radio····························································68
Playing Files Stored on a Computer··············································69
Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices·······················69, 70
Listening to Rhapsody··································································70
Operating the AVP-A1HDCI
Using a Browser (Web control)···············································71, 72
Remote Control Unit Operations
Main Remote Control Unit···························································77
Operating DENON Audio Components·········································77
Presetting······················································································77
Operating Preset Components·············································77 ~ 79
Setting the Remote ID··································································80
Learning Function·········································································80
System Call Function····································································81
Punch Through Function·······························································81
Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit·······································82
Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness············································82
Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit·····································82
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations···································83, 84
Switching Zones···········································································85
Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit
is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)···········································85
Setting the Remote ID··································································85
Resetting the Settings··································································85
Multi-Zone Connections and Operations
Multi-Zone Connections·······························································86
Multi-Zone Operations··································································87
Turning the Power On and Off······················································87
Selecting the Input Source····························································87
Adjusting the Volume····································································87
Turning off the Sound Temporarily···············································87
Other Information······························································· 88 ~ 102
Troubleshooting······························································· 103 ~ 107
Specifications···············································································108
List of preset codes············································ End of this manual
Other Operations and Functions
Other Operations········································································72
Playing Super Audio CD································································72
Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)·····················73
Convenient Functions···································································74
HDMI Control Function·································································74
Channel Level···············································································75
Fader Function··············································································75
Quick Select Function···································································75
Personal Memory Plus Function···················································75
Last Function Memory··································································76
Backup Memory············································································76
Resetting the Microprocessor······················································76
Getting Started
Cautions on Handling
•Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
Getting Started
Connections
Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper
operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the
product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Setup
Accessories
Playback
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
qOwner’s manual....................................................................... 1
wWarranty (for North America model only)................................. 1
eService station list.................................................................... 1
rPower cord (Cord length: Approx. 5 ft /1.5 m)......................... 1
tMain remote control (RC-1067)................................................ 1
yLR6/AA batteries (for RC-1067)................................................ 2
uSub remote control (RC-1070).................................................. 1
iR03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070).............................................. 2
oFM indoor antenna................................................................... 1
Q0AM loop antenna (small, for AM broadcasts)........................... 1
Q1AM loop antenna (large, for HD Radio broadcasts).................. 1
Q2Dipole antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts)............................... 1
Q3Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection............................... 1
Q4Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 7.6 m)...................... 1
r
t
About the Remote Control Unit
u
•Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long
periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
•About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
Troubleshooting
Q0
Q1
•Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before
moving the unit.
•Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the
actual unit for explanation purposes.
Specifications
Q3
Q4
(RC-1067)
(RC-1070)
w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the
battery compartment.
(RC-1067)
(RC-1070)
R03/AAA
LR6/AA
e Put the rear cover back on.
Note:
For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
b
b
b
Wall
q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.
•Light Emitting Diodes (LED) are used in the AVP-A1HDCI circuit.
When powered on, a green light shows inside part of the AVPA1HDCI, however this is not a fault.
bNote
Q2
Inserting the Batteries
•Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move
the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
Cautions on Installation
o
In addition to the AVP-A1HDCI, the included main remote control unit
(RC-1067) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.
qDENON system components
wNon-DENON system components
•By setting the preset memory (vpage 77 ~ 79)
•By using the learn function (vpage 80)
Part Names and Functions
Getting Started
NOTE
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Front Panel
Q0
o
i
u
Connections
y
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
•Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate
even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.
•The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.
•When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment.
•To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
•Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
•Do not use two different types of batteries.
•Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
•Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
•If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
•Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
•When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and
insert them as quickly as possible.
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Operating Range of the Remote Control
Unit
Multi-Zone
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
30°
or
qPower operation button (ON/STANDBY)······························(58)
wPower indicator········································································(58)
ePower switch (hON jOFF)···················································(58)
rDoor·····························································································(5)
tQUICK SELECT buttons / indicators·······································(75)
yMASTER VOLUME control knob·············································(58)
uMaster volume indicator
t
iDisplay·························································································(5)
oRemote control sensor······························································(4)
Q0SOURCE SELECT knob····························································(45)
Q1SOURCE button········································································(45)
Q2TUNING PRESET button··························································(59)
Q3ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT button·····································(73, 87)
Q4VIDEO SELECT button·····························································(46)
(RC-1067)
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared
light.
Specifications
Approx. 7 m
r
Troubleshooting
(RC-1070)
30°
w e
Information
q
Getting Started
GWith the door openH
W9 W8
W7
W6
Display
W5 W4
W3 W2 W1 W0
Q9
Q8
Q7 Q6
Q5
Q4 Q3
Q9
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2 Q0
Q1
o i
u
y
Connections
Setup
Playback
q w
er t y
u
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
qDIRECT/STEREO button····························· (51)
wHeadphones jack (PHONES)················· (58, 73)
eCINEMA button··········································· (50)
rRESTORER button······································· (55)
tMUSIC button·············································· (50)
yNIGHT button·············································· (55)
uMENU button··············································· (24)
iCH SEL / ENTER button························ (24, 75)
oRETURN button··········································· (24)
Q0V.AUX INPUT connectors··························· (18)
Q1ROOM EQ button········································ (55)
Q2SETUP MIC jack··········································· (26)
Q3DYNAMIC EQ button··································· (55)
Q4STATUS button··········································· (57)
Q5DIMMER button··········································· (43)
i
o
Q0
Q1
q
Q2
Q6SCALE button·············································· (47)
Q7USB port······················································· (19)
Q8ZONE4 ON/OFF button······························· (87)
Q9ZONE3 ON/OFF button······························· (87)
W0ZONE2 ON/OFF button······························· (87)
W1AUDIO DELAY button································· (56)
W2Cursor buttons (uio p)··························· (24)
W3GAME button··············································· (50)
W4INPUT MODE button··································· (47)
W57CH STEREO button···································· (51)
W6DSP SIMULATION button··························· (51)
W7HOME THX CINEMA button······················· (50)
W8STANDARD button······································ (51)
W9PURE DIRECT button·································· (52)
w
qInput signal indicators
wInput signal channel indicators
The input source name, surround mode, setting
values and other information are displayed
here.
rOutput signal channel indicators
tSurround speaker indicators
These light according to the settings of the
surround A and B speakers.
yMonitor output indicators
These light according to the HDMI monitor
output setting. When set to “Auto (Dual)”, the
indicators light according to the connection
status.
uMaster volume indicator
iAUDYSSEY DYNAMIC EQ indicator
Specifications
This lights when the room equalizer is selected.
Q0Recording output source indicator
Q3RESTORER indicator
This lights when the REC OUT mode is
selected.
This lights when the night mode is selected.
These light when the power for the respective
zone is turned on.
This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is
activated (vpage 92).
Q5D.LINK indicator
This lights when playing using DENON LINK
connections.
Q6Input mode indicators
Q7HDMI indicator
This lights
connections.
when
playing
using
HDMI
Q8Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are
operating.
Q9Tuner reception mode indicators
Q1NIGHT indicator
Q2Multi zone indicators
This lights when the RESTORER mode is
selected.
Q4ADVANCED AL24 indicator
This lights when the Dynamic EQ is selected.
oAUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator
r t
These light when digital signals are input.
eInformation display
e
These light according to the reception conditions
when the input source is set to “TUNER” or
“HD Radio”.
•AUTO
This lights when in the auto tuning mode.
•RDS
These light when receiving RDS broadcasts.
•STEREO
In the FM mode, this lights when receiving
analog stereo broadcasts.
•TUNED
This lights when the broadcast is properly tuned
in.
W1
i
W0 Q9
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1 Q0
o
Getting Started
Rear Panel
i
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
W2 W3 W4
Information
Troubleshooting
w
qCONTROL LINK connector·························· (11)
wRS-232C connector······································ (23)
eAnalog audio connectors (AUDIO)············ (14)
rRCA PRE OUT connectors···················· (11, 22)
tEXT. IN connectors······································ (18)
yAC inlet (AC IN)············································ (23)
uAC OUTLETS················································ (23)
e
r
iXLR PRE OUT connectors··························· (11)
oHD Radio antenna terminals
(DTU ANTENNA)········································· (20)
Q0COMPONENT VIDEO connectors········· (13, 22)
Q1Digital audio connectors
(OPTICAL / COAXIAL / BNC)················ (13, 22)
Q2HDMI connectors········································· (12)
t
Q3ETHERNET connector································· (21)
Q4USB port······················································· (19)
Q5XM connector (SAT TU)······························ (19)
Q6WLAN ANTENNA terminal························· (21)
Q7FM/AM antenna terminals
(TUNER ANTENNA)····································· (20)
y
u
Q9TRIGGER OUT jacks···································· (23)
W0REMOTE CONTROL jacks··························· (22)
W1XLR audio connectors (CD)························ (14)
W2DOCK CONTROL jack·································· (14)
W3SIGNAL GND terminal································ (14)
W4VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors····················· (13)
Q8DENON LINK connector······························ (18)
Specifications
q
Getting Started
Remote Control Unit
nMain remote control unit (RC-1067)
Q5
Connections
q
Setup
w
Playback
e
Q6
Q7
Remote Control
r
t
y
u
i
Multi-Zone
o
Q8
Q9
W0
W1
W2
Information
Troubleshooting
Q2
Q3
HOME button········································· (32, 77)
Q5Remote control signal transmitter·············· (4)
Q6Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2)···· (77)
Q7ZONE3 / ZONE4 select indicators
(Z3 / Z4)························································ (87)
W6
W7
W4Return button (RTN)··································· (24)
W5Master volume control buttons (VOL)······ (58)
W6Muting button (MUTE)························· (58, 87)
W7Main remote control unit setup button
W5
Specifications
Q4
Q2
Q3
w
e
(RC SETUP)·················································· (77)
NOTE
The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A. DL,
RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround
mode buttons cannot be used.
qZONE indicators·········································· (85)
wAdvanced setup button······························ (85)
eInput source select buttons························ (45)
rCHANNEL buttons································· (65, 84)
tSHIFT button················································ (59)
yMENU button··············································· (24)
uCursor buttons (uio p)·························· (24)
iSEARCH button······························· (60, 62, 65)
oREPEAT button············································ (65)
Q0RANDOM button········································· (65)
Q1Remote control signal transmitter·············· (4)
Q2ZONE SELECT button································· (85)
Q3Zone power on/off buttons
(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF)······························ (87)
Q4Master volume control buttons
r
Q4
t
Q5
Q6
W0USB (DIRECT PLAY) button························ (83)
The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3 and OPTION buttons
cannot be used.
Q7
Q8
o
Q0
(DIRECT PLAY) button······························· (83)
NOTE
u
i
(VOLUME)··················································· (58)
Q5Muting button (MUTE)························· (58, 87)
Q6ENTER button·············································· (24)
Q7RETURN button··········································· (24)
Q8System buttons······························· (59, 83, 84)
Q9ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES
y
ENTER button········································ (24, 75)
The time for which the backlight stays on can
be changed (vpage 82 “Setting the Time the
Backlight Stays Lit”).
q
Number buttons···································· (45, 58)
Q8RESTORER button (RSTR)·························· (55)
Q9Night button (NGT)····································· (55)
W0Test tone button (TEST)····························· (30)
W1Surround speaker select button (SPKR)····· (31)
W2POWER buttons··········································· (58)
W3Channel select (CH SEL) /
W4
Q1
Q3Channel buttons (CH)······················ (59, 65, 78)
Q4Input source select /
W3
nSub remote control unit (RC-1070)
(PARA / SRCH)··························· (52, 60, 62, 65)
Q2Monitor select (M. SEL) /
Q0
Q1
qSignal transmission indicator···················· (77)
wMode select buttons··································· (77)
eQuick select / System call buttons······ (75, 81)
rSurround mode buttons·····················(50 ~ 52)
tSystem buttons····································· (78, 79)
yAudio delay button (A. DL)························· (56)
uTuner system buttons··························· (59, 79)
iInput mode button (INPUT)························ (47)
oMENU button··············································· (24)
Q0Cursor buttons (uio p)·························· (24)
Q1Parameter / Search button
Q9
W0
Connections
Cables Used for Connections
Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.
Audio cables
Component video connections
(Green)
(Orange)
(PB/CB)
(Red)
(PR/CR)
Playback
Optical digital connections
(Y)
(Blue)
Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable
Setup
Component video cable
(Green)
Optical cable
(Y)
(Blue)
BNC digital connections
(PB/CB)
(Red)
Remote Control
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been
completed.
•When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the other components.
•Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left,
right with right).
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing
so can result in humming or noise.
Video cables
Coaxial digital connections
NOTE
Connections
Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are
described in these operating instructions. Please select the types
of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting.
With some types of connections, certain settings must be made
on the AVP-A1HDCI. For details, refer to the instructions for the
respective connection items below.
Getting Started
Preparations
(PR/CR)
BNC (75 Ω/ohms) cable
BNC (75 Ω/ohms) cable
S-Video connections
Multi-Zone
Analog connections (XLR)
Balanced cable
S-Video cable
Analog connections (stereo, RCA)
(White)
L
L
(Red)
R
R
(Yellow)
75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable
(Black)
Pin-plug cable
Troubleshooting
Stereo pin-plug cable
Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)
Information
Video connections
Audio and video cables
HDMI connections
Specifications
19-pin HDMI cable
DENON LINK connections
Signal direction
DENON LINK cable
Audio signal:
Video signal:
Output
Network connections (wired LAN)
Input
Output
Input
Ethernet cable
Input
Output Input
Output
Getting Started
GFlow of video signals for ZONE3H
Video Conversion Function
ZONE3
Connections
•This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVP-A1HDCI into the
format used to output the video signals from the AVP-A1HDCI to a monitor.
•The AVP-A1HDCI’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video
signals:
Digital video signals: HDMI
Analog video signals:Component video, S-Video and Video
High picture
quality playback
S-Video connector
GFlow of video signals inside the AVP-A1HDCIH
Setup
MAIN ZONE
Playback
High picture
quality playback
HDMI connector
Remote Control
Component video
connectors
ZONE3
monitor
Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs
Video outputs
HDMI connector
Component video
connectors
Monitor
•When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video
input connector.
•The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVP-A1HDCI can be checked at
GUI menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor1” or “Monitor2” (vpage 57).
NOTE
Multi-Zone
Information
S-Video connector
S-Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs
Video outputs
•For optimum video performance, THX recommends that you set the conversion mode to “OFF” to use
video signals pass through system without up conversion.
Example: View video input from a component video on the component video monitor.
•HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
•1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video
connectors.
•480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video
format.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video
conversion function might not operate.
: When 480i/576i signals are input
Troubleshooting
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H
ZONE2
High picture
quality playback
Specifications
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
S-Video connector
S-Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs
Video outputs
: When 480i/576i signals are input
ZONE2
monitor
The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and
a monitor.
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Setup
POA-A1HDCI Connection and Operation
Surround speakers
Multi-Zone
•For instructions for connecting speakers, please refer to the POA-A1HDCI owner’s manual.
•When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).
Information
Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema,THX Music mode and THX Games
mode.
Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left
and right speakers. It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position
to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR),
surround back left (SBL) and surround back right (SBR)) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).
Troubleshooting
The table below shows a typical speaker configuration for the AVP-A1HDCI.
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND SURROUND
SURROUND BACK SUBWOOFER
A
B
(b)
L
R
L
R
L
R
1 only
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
–
S
7.1-channels
S
S
S
S
S
–
–
S
S
–
S
6.1-channels
S
S
S
S
S
–
–
–
–
S
S
5.1-channels
S
S
S
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
S
3.1-channels
S
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
2.1-channels
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
2-channels
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Specifications
L
9.1-channels
Remote Control
•When connecting the AVP-A1HDCI to the power amp POA-A1HDCI with a control link cable (included
with the POA-A1HDCI), you can perform the following control operations.
• POA-A1HDCI channel input selection and power amp settings
• Link POA-A1HDCI to AVP-A1HDCI On/Standby control
• Link POA-A1HDCI meter operation to AVP-A1HDCI display on/off control (vpage 43)
• Updating POA-A1HDCI firmware (vpage 43)
•Up to 2 POA-A1HDCI units can be connected. Refer to the POA-A1HDCI owner's manual for making
connections and POA-A1HDCI settings.
Playback
Front speakers
Place the front speakers to the
sides of the monitor or screen and
as flush with the screen surface as
possible.
Connections
Surround back speakers
•Connect the AVP-A1HDCI pre-out terminal to the power amp (sold separately).
•AVP-A1HDCI has a RCA pre-out terminal and XLR pre-out terminal. Connect accordingly with the power
amp you want to use.
•The polarity of the XLR pre-out terminal can be switched using GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option
Setup” – “XLR Out Polarity” (vpage 41).
•Connect the speakers to the power amp.
•Refer to the owner’s manual of each piece of equipment when making connections.
Getting Started
Connecting to the Power Amp
Speaker Layout
bThe AVP-A1HDCI can be connected to a maximum of 3 subwoofers.
10
Getting Started
Connections
nConnecting the XLR pre-out terminal (Example : 9.3-channels)
When using Subwoofer 2 or 3, set GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Subwoofer
Setup” (vpage 29).
nConnecting the RCA pre-out terminal (Example : 9.3-channels)
Subwoofer 3
bL : Left
R : Right
Subwoofer 2
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
*/
Connections
Subwoofer 1
bL : Left
R : Right
Subwoofer 2
Subwoofer 3
Subwoofer 1
*/
*/
AVP-A1HDCI
Setup
Subwoofer
with built-in
amplifier
*/
Playback
AVP-A1HDCI
*/
*/
Remote Control
POA-A1HDCI
POA-A1HDCI
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
RCA
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
XLR
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
Specifications
(R)
(R)
w
Front
speaker (R)
(R)
(R)
w
Front
speaker (R)
11
q
(R)
(R)
(L)
w
w
Surround
speakerB (R)
q
w
q w
Surround
speakerA (R)
q
Surround
back
speaker
(R)
(L)
(L)
(L)
q
w
Center
speaker
q
Surround
back
speaker
(L)
w
q
w
Surround
speakerA (L)
q
w
Surround
speakerB (L)
q
Front
speaker (L)
q
(R)
(R)
(L)
w
w
Surround
speakerB (R)
q
w
q w
Surround
speakerA (R)
q
Surround
back
speaker
(R)
(L)
(L)
(L)
q
w
Center
speaker
q
Surround
back
speaker
(L)
w
q
w
Surround
speakerA (L)
q
w
Surround
speakerB (L)
The default AVP-A1HDCI balance model XLR pre-out terminal pin alignment is as shown.
q : GROUND
w : HOT
e : COLD
q
Front
speaker (L)
1
Connect AVP-A1HDCI and POA-A1HDCI with the
control link cable.
DVD
player
Monitor
)%.*
065
)%.*
*/
“AVP”.
Set the POA-A1HDCI’s mode select switch according
When connecting 1 unit : “1”
When connecting 2 units: 1st unit “1”, 2nd unit “2”
2ch 32-192 kHz
16/20/24 bits
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio
Multi-channel linear
PCM
8ch 32-192 kHz
16/20/24 bits
DVD-Audio
Dolby Digital, DTS
Bitstream
DVD-Video
DSD
2/5.1ch
2.8224 MHz
1 bit
SACD
Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD,
DTS-HD
Bitstream
HD DVD,
Blu-ray Disc
on.
Depending on the number of POA-A1HDCI units to
When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable
(adapter)
– “LINK Check” to check the connection.
12
Specifications
bThe AVP-A1HDCI is supported to the feature of HDMI listed below.
•30 and 36 bit Deep Color
•xvYCC
•Auto Lipsync Correction
Troubleshooting
•By default, HDMI sound is output from the speaker of the power
amp connected to AVP-A1HDCI.
•To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu
“Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 32).
•HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI
format.
When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D
connector, connection is possible using an HDMI/DVI converter
cable, but depending on the combination of components in some
cases the video signals will not be output.
•When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video
signals may not be output properly due to poor connections with
the connected cable, etc.
Information
Use GUI menu “Option Setup” – “POA Setting”
Multi-Zone
be connected, set GUI menu “Option Setup” – “POA
Setting” – “POA LINK” to either “ON (Single)” or
“ON (Dual)” (vpage 41).
Remote Control
In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD- Video or
DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both the connected
DVD player and monitor must be equipped for a copyright protection
system called “HDCP” (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding
and mutual identification of the devices.
The AVP-A1HDCI is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player
or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions.
Switch the AVP-A1HDCI and POA-A1HDCI power
6
2-channel linear PCM
Copyright protection system (HDCP)
bRefer to the POA-A1HDCI owner’s manual for details.
4
5
Discs
(examples)
Playback
to the number of POA-A1HDCI units you are
connecting.
Details
Setup
2
3
Set the POA-A1HDCI’s control selector switch to
With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred
with a single cable.
Compatible audio
format
Connections
bThe control link cable is included with the POA-A1HDCI.
bAVP-A1HDCI can be connected and control to up to 2 POAA1HDCI units.
Refer to the POA-A1HDCI user’s manual for how to connect.
Connecting Equipment with HDMI
connectors
Getting Started
Operations
Getting Started
NOTE
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
•Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that
are copyright-protected by CPPM.
•The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling
frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted by the connected
device.
•Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are
not HDCP-compatible.
•Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match
the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the DVD player’s
resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
•If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio”
setting (vpage 32) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be
interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off.
•Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI
product) for connection to the HDMI connector. Normal playback
may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which
the HDMI logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product).
•If the monitor or DVD player does not support Deep Color, Deep
Color signal transfer is not possible.
•If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC
signal transfer is not possible.
•If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction”
function, this function will not work.
•The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with the HDMI’s CEC (Consumer
Electronics Control) function. Please note the following.
• It may not work depending on the device it is connected to and
its setup.
• It does not operate with televisions or players that are not
compatible with HDMI’s CEC.
Troubleshooting
Specifications
•When the AVP-A1HDCI and DVD player are connected using an
HDMI cable, also connect the AVP-A1HDCI and monitor using an
HDMI cable.
•If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D
connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. When using a DVI
cable, no audio signals are transmitted.
•Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color
compatible devices.
Connecting the Monitor
•Connect the cables to be used (vpage 9 “Video Conversion
Function”).
•With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be
transferred with a single cable.
•To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections,
set GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV”
(vpage 32).
Monitor
7*%&0
7*%&0
*/
47*%&0
*/
$0.10/&/57*%&0
*/
:
1# 13
)%.*
*/
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and
outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
DVD Player
•Connect the cables to be used.
•With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred
with a single cable.
DVD player
7*%&0
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
)%.*
065
$0"9*"065
"6%*0
065
3
L
R
L
R
NOTE
•The component video connectors may be indicated differently on
your monitor. For details, see the monitor’s operating instructions.
•The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the
HDMI input signals.
13
Connecting the Playback Components
•Connect an HDP (High-Definition Player) in the same way.
•When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio
connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVD”
– “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).
•When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make
the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” –
“Component” (vpage 48).
CD Player
Turntable (MM cartridge)
iPod®
Connect the cables to be used.
CD player
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
$0"9*"065
Example :
iPod
L
R
Setup
"6%*0
065
(/%
"4%3
R
L
Playback
L
Connections
9-3
065
3
Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to
connect the iPod to the AVP-A1HDCI. For instructions on the Control
Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating
instructions.
Getting Started
Record Player
R
L
R
L
Remote Control
R
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
NOTE
The AVP-A1HDCI’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise
when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground
terminal.
Specifications
•When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a
commercially available MC head amplifier or a step-up transformer.
•Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the
speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.
•With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground
wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.
•When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio
connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD”
– “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).
•The default analog audio input setting is “RCA”. When using a
balanced cable for the analog audio connection, make the settings at
GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Analog” (vpage
49).
NOTE
The default AVP-A1HDCI balance model XLR input connectors pin
alignment is as shown.
q : GROUND
w : HOT
e : COLD
•With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the
VCR (iPod) connector.
•To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the
settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which
iPod dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 49).
14
Getting Started
TV/CABLE Tuner
Satellite Receiver
Connect the cables to be used.
Connect the cables to be used.
TV tuner
DBS / BS tuner
7*%&0
Connections
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
015*$"065
7*%&0
"6%*0
065
3
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
)%.*
065
$0"9*"065
"6%*0
065
3
Setup
Playback
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
•When using a coaxial digital cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at
GUI menu “Source Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).
•When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).
15
•When using an optical cable or a BNC cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI
menu “Source Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 48).
•When using a BNC cable for the component video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).
Getting Started
Connecting the Recording Components
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
Connect the cables to be used.
Digital video recorder
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
"6%*0
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
)%.*
065
015*$"065
7*%&0
"6%*0
065
3
47*%&0
*/
"6%*0
7*%&0
*/
"6%*0
*/
3
-
L
R
L
R
L
R
NOTE
Multi-Zone
Information
•Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVPA1HDCI’s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other
than OPTICAL2.
•Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVPA1HDCI’s OPTICAL3 output connector to any input connector other
than OPTICAL3.
Remote Control
R
Playback
L
015*$"*/
•Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio
signals.
•When recording to a digital video recorder, it is necessary that the
type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same
type that is connected to the AVP-A1HDCI DVR-1 OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR-1 OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : DVR-1 OUT → Video cable
•Connect a DVR-2 in the same way.
•When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the
component video connection make the settings at GUI menu
“Source Select” – “DVR-1” or “DVR-2” – “Assign” – “Component”
(vpage 48).
Setup
7*%&0
Connections
Digital Video Recorder
Troubleshooting
Specifications
16
Getting Started
Video Cassette Recorder
CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck
Connect the cables to be used.
Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to
record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.
Video cassette recorder
7*%&0
Connections
47*%&0
065
"6%*0
7*%&0
065
"6%*0
065
3
Setup
L
Playback
L
R
R
015*$"065
7*%&0
)%.*
065
47*%&0
*/
CD recorder / MD recorder /
Tape deck
"6%*0
7*%&0
*/
015*$"*/
"6%*0
*/
3
L
L
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
015*$"065
"6%*0
*/
3
015*$"*/
-
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
•When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment
be the same type that is connected to the AVP-A1HDCI VCR OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable
•When using a component video cable or a BNC cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI
menu “Source Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 48).
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s OPTICAL4 output connector
to any input connector other than OPTICAL4.
17
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s OPTICAL4 output connector
to any input connector other than OPTICAL4.
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and
outputs, and be sure to interconnect correctly.
Video Camera / Game Console
Video camera / Game console
7*%&0
47*%&0
065
DVD player / Super Audio CD player /
External decoder
"6%*0
46#
800'&3
'30/5
-
L
L
3
$&/5&3
463306/%
-
3
463306/%
#"$,
-
3
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
Playback
DVD player
015*$"065
Setup
Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super
Audio CD, etc.
"6%*0
065
3
Connections
Components Equipped with a DENON
LINK connector
"6%*0
7*%&0
065
Component with Multi-channel Output
connectors
Getting Started
Connections to Other Devices
"6%*0
%&/0/-*/,
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
18
Specifications
To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu
“Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign” – “Digital” – “DENON
LINK” (vpage 48).
•To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors,
press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button
on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the
settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input
Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 47).
•The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player
(vpage 13).
•To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVP-A1HDCI’s EXT.
IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output
connector.
Getting Started
USB Port
nFront panel
USB memory device
XM Connector
nRear panel
USB memory device
Connections
Setup
Playback
•The AVP-A1HDCI is an XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM®
Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
(includes home antenna, each sold separately) and subscribing to the
XM service.
•Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on
the rear panel.
•Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to
receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs” (vpage
61).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
Remote Control
XM
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
•In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel.
•To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 49.
•For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device, see page 69, 70.
Specifications
NOTE
•Set to the USB port you want to use.
•The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory
devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB”
– “Playback Mode” – “USB Select”.
•Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory deveice to the AVP-A1HDCI’s USB port.
Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.
19
NOTE
Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock connection have been completed.
•The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
•XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All
rights reserved.
HD Radio broadcast is a service that is only available within the United States.
An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.
Direction of broadcasting station
AM/FM
FM antenna
AM loop antenna
(small, supplied)
(White)
75 Ω/ohms
Coaxial cable
Playback
75 Ω/ohms
Coaxial cable
(Black)
Setup
(White)
FM antenna
Connections
Direction of broadcasting station
AM loop antenna
(large, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)
•To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 feet/
1 m away from the antenna connected to the
AVP-A1HDCI’s other AM tuner terminal.
Getting Started
HD Radio™ broadcast
Antenna terminals
(Black)
Remote Control
FM indoor antenna
(dipole, for HD Radio
broadcasting, supplied)
Multi-Zone
FM indoor
antenna
(supplied)
Information
AM outdoor antenna
Connection of AM antennas
AM loop antenna assembly
Remove the vinyl tie and take
out the connection line.
a.With the antenna on top of
any stable surface.
Mount
1.Push the
lever.
Connect to the AM
antenna terminals.
2.Insert the
conductor.
3.Return the
lever.
Bend in the reverse direction.
NOTE
b.With the antenna attached
to a wall.
Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.
•Do
not
connect
two
FM
antennas
simultaneously.
•Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not
disconnect the AM loop antenna.
•Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do
not touch metal parts of the panel.
20
Specifications
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
which provides guidelines for proper grounding
and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground
shall be connected to the grounding system of
the building, as close to the point of cable entry
as practical.
Ground
AM outdoor antenna
Troubleshooting
Ground
Getting Started
Required system
Network Audio
nBroadband Internet connection
A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to
use the AVP-A1HDCI’s Internet radio function and firmware update.
[Wired LAN]
Connections
Modem
Computer
Internet
nModem
This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to communicate
with the Internet. Some are integrated with the router.
nRouter
Setup
To WAN side
Playback
To LAN port
To LAN port
LAN port/Ethernet
connector
Remote Control
nEthernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
Router
Multi-Zone
Use for wired LAN.
•The AVP-A1HDCI does not come with an Ethernet cable.
•Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
•If the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much
power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network
environment, use a shielded type Ethernet cable.
Information
nComputer
[Wireless LAN]
Computer
Troubleshooting
Internet
Modem
To WAN side
Specifications
Rod antenna
(supplied)
Router with access point
21
•When using the AVP-A1HDCI, we recommend you use a router
equipped with the following functions:
· Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
· Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
•When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with
built-in access point.
Turn clockwise.
A computer with the following specifications is required to use a
media server:
•OS
Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista
•Software (Prepare one of the following.)
· .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)
· Windows Media Player ver.11
· DLNA-compatible server software
•Internet browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later
•LAN port
•300 MB or more free disk space
bFree disk space is required to store music and video files. The
following sizes are approximate.
Format
Bit rate
128kbps
MP3 / WMA 192kbps
MPEG-4 AAC 256kbps
392kbps
WAV (LPCM) 1400kbps
1080kbps
FLAC
Per minute
Approx. 1MB
Approx.1.5MB
Approx. 2MB
Approx. 3MB
Approx.10 MB
Approx.7.7MB
Per hour
Approx. 60MB
Approx. 90MB
Approx.120MB
Approx.180MB
Approx.600MB
Approx.464MB
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
NOTE
•A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
•The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
•Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they
cannot be played on the AVP-A1HDCI.
nOthers
•If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which
network settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 35 ~ 38).
•With the AVP-A1HDCI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP
functions to make the network settings automatically.
•When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVP-A1HDCI
sets the IP address, etc., automatically.
When using the AVP-A1HDCI connected to a network with no
DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 35 ~ 38).
•The AVP-A1HDCI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoEcompatible router is required if you have a contract for a line of the
type with which the PPPoE is set.
•Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may
be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet
radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer
to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the
AVP-A1HDCI in the same way.
ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections
Monitor
7*%&0
"6%*0
7*%&0
*/
47*%&0
*/
$0.10/&/57*%&0
*/
:
1# 13
7*%&0
"6%*0
7*%&0
*/
"6%*0
*/
3
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
"6%*0
"6%*0
015*$"*/
015*$"*/
Multi-Zone
L
AV amplifier
(ZONE4)
Remote Control
"6%*0
*/
3
Monitor
Power
amplifier
AV amplifier
(ZONE2)
Playback
ZONE3
The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with Optical output connectors for ZONE2 and ZONE4. If a bit-stream amp
is rigged-up, these zones can also be used to enjoy home theater.
Setup
ZONE2
Power
amplifier
ZONE2 or ZONE4 Optical Connections
Connections
•If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out
(variable or fixed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3
the same time (vpage 86, 87).
•To the monitor output of ZONE2, various formats of video signals input by the video conversion function
are automatically converted and output (vpage 9).
•To the monitor output of ZONE3, video signals input from the S video terminal or video terminal is output
(vpage 9).
•The ZONE2 (ZONE3) video out is only for ZONE2 (ZONE3).
•For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.
•For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’
operating instructions.
•To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 86, 87).
Getting Started
NOTE
Multi Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
"69
065
Infrared
retransmitter
Input
Output
Infrared
sensor
Extension jack for future use.
•Connect the monitor for ZONE2 the same as the “ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connectors” (vSee left
column).
•If the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog, change to PCM(2-channel) signal, and output it from ZONE2
optical output connectors.
22
Getting Started
Connecting the Power Cord
External Controller
Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.
Connections
Power cord
(included)
RS-232C connector
To household
power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Setup
This connector is used for an external controller.
Playback
b If you use an external controller to operate
the unit via the RS-232C terminal, you must
confirm the following beforehand.
q Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI’s power.
w Turn off the AVP-A1HDCI’s power from the
external controller.
e AVP-A1HDCI enters the standby status.
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
•When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) and RF Remote
Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible.
The AVP-A1HDCI’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed
watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the
respective devices.
•When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller and RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 42).
•When using the 2-way remote control unit, connect to the Port 1 RS-232C connector.
•If GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote”is set to “Used”, you cannot use port
1 of the RS-232C connector for the external controller.
Trigger output jacks
Specifications
The power of an external device equipped with
a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in
association with operations on the AVP-A1HDCI.
For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” –
“Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1”, “Trigger Out 2”,
“Trigger Out 3” or “Trigger Out 4” (vpage 42).
•Output level: 250 mA/12 V
Check the trigger input conditions of the
connected device.
23
Connection to the AC outlets
•These outlets supply power to external audio
devices.
•The power supplied from this outlets turns on and
off together with the set’s power switch.
•Audio equipment with a total power consumption
of 120 W (1 A) can be connected.
NOTE
•Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.
•Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or
anything other than audio equipment. In addition, do not connect audio devices such as high electricity
consumption power amplifiers (e.g. POA-A1HDCI).
Once Connections are Completed
Turning the Power On (vpage 58)
GUI Menu Operations
Switch to the next item
Selected item
name
Example: Menus with Illustrations
(Auto Setup)
Operation guidance text
Operation step indicators
5.1
1 2 3 4 5
Illustration
1
Press the MENU button.
The GUI menu is displayed.
bTo operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
Start
Config.
9.1
SW
1SP
Pre-out Assign
XLR Out Polarity
2
Press the u
Enter
Guidance text for item at cursor
position
RETURN
Cancel
Operation
button guidance
i p button to select the menu to be set
or operated.
bTo return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.
Specifications
7.1
The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit.
STEP1 Speaker Detection
Please place the microphone at ear
height at main listening position.
Start Auto Setup
Operations
Troubleshooting
[Selectable items] 9.1
bSwitch the selected item using
ui.
Information
In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item
surrounded by a border is the default value.
Switch to the next item
Multi-Zone
Example of Display of Default
Values
Selected item
Assign
Video
Input Mode
Rename
AUTO SETUP
This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the menu series to
which this item belongs.
nList
Remote Control
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
Switch the selected item
Playback
Guidance text for item
at cursor position
Selected item
Setup
List of subsequent items
Example of the Display of the GUI
Mark at a Title
Auto Setup
Switch the selected item
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)
The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component
1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g.VGA) are input.
Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be operated
from the GUI.
We recommend performing such operations from the GUI.
nIcon
Connections
With the AVP-A1HDCI, settings and operations for most functions can
be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed
on the monitor screen.
Some typical examples are described below.
Cursor Position Display
Getting Started
Examples of GUI Screen Displays
3
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
Press the MENU button to finish.
24
Getting Started
GUI Menu Map
Information
(vpage 56, 57)
Connections
Setup
nStatus
• MAIN ZONE
• ZONE2/3/4
nAudio Input Signal
nHDMI Information
nAuto Surround Mode
nQuick Select
nPreset Station
Source Select (vpage 45 ~ 49)
nTUNER (FM/AM)
• Play
• Auto Preset
• Preset Skip
• Preset Name
• Video
·Video Select
·i/p Scaler
·Resolution
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Source Level
nPHONO
• Video
·Video Select
·i/p Scaler
·Resolution
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Source Level
• Input Att.
Playback
Parameter
(vpage 52 ~ 56)
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
nAudio
• Surround Parameters
·Mode
·Decoder
·Cinema EQ
·DRC
·D.COMP
·LFE
·Center Image
·Panorama
·Dimension
·Center Width
·Delay Time
·Effect
·Effect Level
·Room Size
·AFDM
·SB CH Out
·Input Channel
·Subwoofer Att.
·Subwoofer
·Default
• Tone
·Tone Defeat
·Bass
·Treble
·Front
·Center
·Surround
·Surround Back
·Subwoofer
• Room EQ
• Dynamic EQ
• RESTORER
• Night Mode
• Audio Delay
nPicture Adjust
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Chroma Level
• Hue
• DNR
• Enhancer
• Sharpness
25
nCD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR-1,
DVR-2, V.AUX
• Play (iPod)
• Video
• Playback Mode (iPod)
· Video Select
• Assign
· Video Convert
·HDMI (Excluding CD)
·Digital · i/p Scaler
·Component
· Resolution
·Analog
· Progressive Mode
(CD only)
(Excluding CD)
·iPod dock
· Aspect
(Excluding CD)
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Source Level
• Input Att.
Surround Mode
(vpage 50 ~ 52)
nSTEREO
nDIRECT
nSTANDARD
nDOLBY HEADPHONE
(When using headphones)
nDOLBY PLIIx, DOLBY PLII or
DOLBY PL
nDTS NEO:6
nneural
nHOME THX CINEMA
n7CH STEREO
nWIDE SCREEN
nSUPER STADIUM
nROCK ARENA
nJAZZ CLUB
nCLASSIC CONCERT
nMONO
nVIDEO GAME
nMATRIX
When “Screensaver” is set to “ON”, the
screensaver is activated if no operation is
performed for about 3 minutes.
nNET/USB
• Play
• Playback Mode
• Still Picture
• Video
·Video Select
·i/p Scaler
·Resolution
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Source Level
nXM
nHD Radio
• Play
• Play
• Preset Skip
• Auto Preset
• Antenna Aiming
• Preset Skip
• Video
• Preset Name
·Video Select
• Video
·i/p Scaler
·Video Select
·Resolution
·i/p Scaler
• Input Mode
·Resolution
• Rename
• Input Mode
• Source Level
• Rename
• Source Level
Auto Setup (vpage 26 ~ 28)
nAuto Setup
• STEP1: Speaker Detection
• STEP2: Measurement
• STEP3: Calculation
• STEP4: Check
• STEP5: Store
nOption
• Room EQ
• Direct Mode
• Mic Select
nParameter Check
• Speaker Configuration Check
• Distance Check
• Channel Level Check
• Crossover Check
• EQ Check
• Restore
Manual Setup (vpage 29 ~ 44)
nSpeaker Setup (vpage 29 ~ 31)
• Speaker Configuration
• Subwoofer Setup
• Distance
• Channel Level
• Crossover Frequency
• THX Audio Setup
• Surround Speaker
nHDMI Setup (vpage 32)
• Color Space
• RGB Range
• Auto Lip Sync
• Audio
• Monitor Out
• HDMI Control
nAudio Setup (vpage 33, 34)
• EXT. IN Setup
·Mode
·Surround Back Input
·Surround Speaker
·Subwoofer Level
·Input Att.
• 2ch Direct/Stereo
• Downmix Option
• Auto Surround Mode
• Manual EQ
nNetwork Setup
(vpage 35 ~ 38)
• Network Setup
• Other
·Power Saving
·Character
·PC Language
·Rhapsody Account
• Network Information
nZone Setup (vpage 39)
• ZONE2, ZONE3
·Bass
·Treble
·HPF
·Lch Level
·Rch Level
·Channel
·Volume Level
·Volume Limit
·Power On Level
·Mute Level
·Video Convert (ZONE2 only)
• OSD
nOption Setup (vpage 40 ~ 44)
• Pre-out Assign
• XLR Out Polarity
• POA Setting
• Volume Control
·Volume Limit
·Power On Level
·Mute Level
• Source Delete
• GUI
·Screensaver
·Wall Paper
·Format
·Text
·Master Volume
·NET/USB / iPod / Tuner
• Quick Select Name
• Trigger Out 1
• Trigger Out 2
• Trigger Out 3
• Trigger Out 4
• Transducer Setup
• Digital Out
• Remote ID
• 2Way Remote
• Dimmer
• Setup Lock
• Maintenance Mode
• Firmware Update
• Add New Feature
nLanguage (vpage 44)
Preparations
1
Auto Setup
Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to
Auto Setup
Getting Started
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit.
The “Auto Setup” screen appears automatically.
F Menu tree F
a Auto Setup
Sound
receptor
s Option
d Parameter Check
with the microphone pointing directly up towards the
ceiling.
aAuto Setup
Playback
2
Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand
Setup
The settings are performed automatically.
GAuto setup flowH
Remote Control
Example q
Connections
Auto Setup
•Audyssey MultEQ® XT automatically measures the acoustical
problems in the listening environment to create the best audio
experience for your home theater.
•It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are
seated.
Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone
(DM-A505Z) successively at multiple positions throughout the
listening area as shown in Example q. For best results, it is
strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the
measurements have the proper spatial weighting.
Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example w,
measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment
results in more effective correction.
STEP1:Speaker Detection
Example w
STEP2:Measurement (2 to 8 positions)
STEP3:Calculation
( :Measuring positions)
*M
bIt is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the
path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects.
Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound
reflections may give inaccurate results.
Information
*M
Multi-Zone
Setup
microphone
STEP4:Check
Troubleshooting
STEP5:Store
About the main listening position (*M)
To make manual adjustments to the settings, see pages 29 ~ 31.
Specifications
The main listening position refers to the most central position where
one would normally sit within the listening environment.
MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate
speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value
for the subwoofer.
When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting
the auto setup procedure:
•Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible
•If this is not possible then set
• Volume: “12 o’clock” position
• Crossover frequency: “Maximum/Highest Frequency”
• Low pass filter: “Off”
• Standby mode: “Off”
NOTE
•Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup
procedure is completed.
•When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting
the auto setup procedure.
26
Getting Started
Start
Pre-out Assign
Connections
Start Auto Setup.
The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates
the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and
optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ
XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area.
Before starting, connect and position all your speakers.
Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each
speaker.
STEP2: Measurement
Change the pre-out assignment.
[Selectable items] Normal
Free Assign
XLR Out Polarity
Set to switch the XLR pre-out terminal polarity.
[Selectable items]
XLR
XLR (INV)
After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to
the next position.
Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other
surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6
or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions).
STEP3: Calculation
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error
Messages” (vpage 28), take the advised action, then start the
measurements again.
Set each channel.
Configuration
The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the first
measurement position. The following attributes are also determined
at this time: “Speaker Size”, “Speaker Distance”, “Channel Level”,
“Crossover Frequency”.
Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed.
The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time
here.
z1
z1
z1
[Selectable items] 9.1
9.2
9.3
7.1
z2
z3
7.2
7.3
5.1
z2
z3
5.2
5.3
z2
z3
Multi-Zone
Information
z1: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “1SP”.
z2: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “2SP L/R” or “2SP
MIX”.
z3: This can be set when “Subwoofer” is set to “3SP L/R/LFE” or
“3SP MIX”.
Troubleshooting
Setting the correct speaker configuration can reduce the time required
to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not
have to look for speakers that are not connected.
Subwoofer
The configuration of the measuring subwoofer can be selected
beforehand.
Specifications
[Selectable items] 1SP
27
2SP L/R 2SP MIX
3SP L/R/LFE 3SP MIX
STEP1 : Speaker Detection
NOTE
•Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT
Automatic Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is
background noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume.
•Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This
will cause inaccurate readings.
•Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and
refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices
that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected
by these sounds.
•Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL
+/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will
cancel the measurements.
•Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after
“STEP1”.
When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the measurements taken
are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system
interacts with the room.
The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers
connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time
required for analysis.
STEP4: Check
Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check
screen appears.
Select any item whose results you want to check to review the
results.
Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for
speakers with built-in filters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because filters
add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated.
STEP5: Store
The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVP-A1HDCI.
NOTE
Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored.
sOption
If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error message is
displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over
again.
Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.
Getting Started
Error Messages
Room EQ
No microphone or speaker
Cause
•Included setup microphone is not connected.
Measures
•Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP
MIC jack on the main unit.
•Check the speaker connections.
[Selectable items] All
Assign
Direct Mode
Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.
[Selectable items] ON
OFF
Playback
Mic Select
Remote Control
Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic.
The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.
[Selectable items] Mic
V.AUX L
Only a professionally certified installer should ever connect a
professionally-calibrated microphone to the V.AUX L input on the front
panel.
Information
dParameter Check
Troubleshooting
Check auto setup measurement results.
This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is
completed.
[Selectable items]
Spkr Config Check
Ch. Level Check
EQ Check Restore
The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated
by MultEQ XT when “Restore” is selected.
Select “Retry” to make the measurements again.
NOTE Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.
28
Specifications
Crossover Check
Distance Check
Multi-Zone
•Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting the level and the
distance of the subwoofer manually.
•Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may notice irregular results when setting the level and/or distance of the main speakers. If
this happens, THX recommends setting them manually.
•Please note that any THX main speakers should be set to Small (80 Hz). If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover.
Select room EQ setting method.
Setup
•Not all speakers could be detected.
•The front L speaker was not properly detected.
Ambient noise is too high •Too much noise in the room for accurate •Either turn off any device generating noise or move it
or Level is too low
measurements to be made.
away.
•Try again when the surroundings are quieter.
•Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for •Check the speaker installation and the direction in which
accurate measurements to be made.
the speakers are facing.
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
None
•Displayed speaker could not be detected.
•Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
· The front R speaker was not properly detected.
· Only one channel of the surround (A) and
surround (B) speakers was detected.
· Sound was output from the R channel when only
one surround back speaker was connected.
· The surround back or the surround (B) speaker
was detected, but the surround (A) speaker
was not detected.
· When the subwoofer configuration is set at
“2SP L/R”, “2SP MIX”, “3SP L/R/LFE” or “3SP
MIX”, the subwoofer could not be detected.
Phase
•Displayed speaker connected with the polarities •Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
reversed.
•If the XLR pre-out terminal is used, the polarity is •Check the polarity setting for the XLR output of the
reversed.
displayed pre-set channel.
•For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure
that the wiring is correct, select “Skip”.
Connections
Error messages (examples)
Getting Started
Subwoofer
Manual Setup
[Selectable items] Yes
sSubwoofer Setup
Select subwoofer use.
Connections
Make detailed settings for various parameters
No
Surround A
Configuration
Select surround speakers A use and size.
Select number of subwoofers and configuration.
[Selectable items] Large
[Selectable items]
Small
None
Use this procedure to set the speakers manually
or if you wish to change the settings made with
the auto setup procedure.
Surround B
Playback
1SP
Setup
Speaker Setup
Select subwoofer output configuration and bass signal for
playback.
F Menu tree F
[Selectable items] Large
Select surround speakers B use and size.
Small
None
Manual Setup
Surround Back
Remote Control
Speaker Setup
a Speaker Configuration
Select surround back speaker use and size.
s Subwoofer Setup
[Selectable items] Large
d Distance
2spkrs
f Channel Level
Multi-Zone
g Crossover Frequency
h THX Audio Setup
Small
None
1spkr
Information
Troubleshooting
Select speaker configuration and size.
(bass reproduction capability)
Front
Select front speaker size.
Specifications
Small
Center
Select center speaker use and size.
29
None
When “2SP MIX” or “3SP MIX” is selected, “Subwoofer 1”,
“Subwoofer 2” and “Subwoofer 3” are each displayed.
Mode
aSpeaker Configuration
Small
Subwoofer Connector
SW1
SW1
SW2
SW1
SW2
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW1
SW2
SW3
reproduction.
reproduction.
[Selectable items] Large
Subwoofer Configuration
1SP
L
2SP L/R
R
1
2SP MIX
2
L
3SP L/R/LFE
R
LFE
1
3SP MIX
2
3
Large :Select this for a large speaker with strong bass
Small :Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass
j Surround Speaker
[Selectable items] Large
2SP L/R 2SP MIX 3SP L/R/LFE 3SP MIX
•Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the
speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities
based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage 30,
31).
•When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to
“Yes”.
•If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
•If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround
Back” are automatically set to “None”.
•When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left
channel (SBL).
•To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified
speaker systems, set the front, center and surround speaker size
parameters to “Small” and the subwoofer to “Yes”.
Select bass signal for playing with the subwoofer.
[Selectable items] LFE–THX–
LFE+Main
•THX recommends LFE–THX– mode so that bass interference is less
likely to occur in the room.
•This can be set when the GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” –
“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
•Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the
strongest bass.
•Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be
produced from the subwoofer.
fChannel Level
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Before making the settings, measure the distance from the
listening position to the different speakers.
Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all speakers.
Mode
[Selectable items] Auto
Step
Surround
Select step. (smallest distance)
Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
1ft
0.1m
0.1ft : Can be selected when “Feet” is set.
0.01m : Can be selected when “Meters” is set.
A
Manual
B
A+B
Start
z
Default
[Variable range] OFF
Resets the settings to the default values.
z:“OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is
set to –12 dB.
Distance measurement
[Variable range]
: Display when “Feet” is set.
0.00m ~ 18.00m : Display when “Meters” is set.
Resets the settings to the default values.
gCrossover Frequency
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low
range signal.
[Selectable items]
Operating from the main remote control unit
FIXED–THX– :
Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones
is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the
STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround) and HOME THX CINEMA modes.
The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored
in the memory.
Setup when using a THX-certified speaker.
GAdjusting using test tonesH
q Press the TEST button.
Test tones are output from the various speakers.
w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all
speakers.
e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button
again.
Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output
from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set
here is output.
Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of
the speakers you are using.
40Hz
60Hz
200Hz
250Hz :
80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
150Hz
Advanced :
Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.
Set the distance between the listening position and the various
speakers to no more than 20 ft (6.00 meters).
30
Specifications
NOTE
Default
Troubleshooting
Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2
Cinema, THX Music mode and THX Games mode.
Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening
position is the same for both the left and right speakers.
It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the
listening position to L and R channel speakers (front left (FL) and front
right (FR), surround left (SL) and surround right (SR), surround back left
(SBL) and surround back right (SBR) is less than 2 ft (60 cm).
~ +12dB
Information
0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
0dB
Multi-Zone
Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance.
Set the value closest to the measured distance.
–12dB ~
Remote Control
Output test tone.
Playback
Select unit for distance.
Setup
Select test tone playback method.
Connections
Feet / Meters
•The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB (Cweighted,
slow meter mode) on a sound level meter at the listening position. If
a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the
sound levels are the same. Because adjusting the subwoofer level
test tone by ear is difficult, use a well known music selection and
adjust for natural balance.
•When the GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back”
setting (vpage 29) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker
display is set to “Surround Back”.
•Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” settings are
not displayed.
•“Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration”
–“Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage 29).
•When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the
different speakers.
•When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all
the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the
different surround modes, use the operation see page 75.
Getting Started
dDistance
Getting Started
Connections
Setup
Playback
•Please set all THX Certified speakers, set the “Speaker Configuration”
for all speakers to “Small”. We recommend using with the crossover
frequency set to “FIXED–THX–”, but depending on the speaker,
setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response
near the crossover frequency.
•The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers
that have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Configuration”
or when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 29).
•At the “Advanced” settings, if the “Subwoofer Setup” (vpage
29) setting is set to “LFE–THX–”, GUI menu speakers for which
“Speaker Configuration” is set to “Small” can be set. If set to
“LFE+Main”, the setting can be made regardless of the speaker
size.
•For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)
THX/DOLBY Game
If bass sound feels big compensate by lowering volume.
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items] ON
OFF
Remote Control
hTHX Audio Setup
Set the speaker to play the optimal THX surround mode.
Multi-Zone
THX Ultra2 Subwoofer
Information
[Selectable items] Yes
Set when using a subwoofer compatible with THX Ultra2 standards or
a subwoofer that can be properly played at low range.
[Selectable items]
A+B
A
B
A+B
A
B
A+B
A
B
A+B
A
B
A+B
7CH STEREO
[Selectable items]
DSP SIMULATION
[Selectable items]
SB Speaker Position
Set the distance between the left and right surround back speakers.
1ft – 4ft Over 4ft
•When two surround back speakers have been set in “Speaker
Configuration” (vpage 29), set the distance of the speakers. This
option is not available when “1spkr” is selected.
•This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX
Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music mode and THX Games
mode.
MULTI CH MODE
[Selectable items]
Operating from the main remote control unit
Press the SPKR button.
Surround A
Surround B
Surround A+B
No
jSurround Speaker
Troubleshooting
Make these settings when “Yes” is selected for the subwoofer in the
“Speaker Configuration” settings. This option is not available when
“No” is selected (vpage 29).
Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.
THX/DOLBY/DTS Cinema
[Selectable items]
A
B
A+B
Specifications
THX/DOLBY/DTS Music
[Selectable items]
31
B
WIDE SCREEN
•If the bass sound seems too strong:
Set “BGC” to “ON”. This activates a filter that gently reduces very
deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass
response. Select “ON” or “OFF” according to how strong you prefer
the deep bass response to be.
•This can be set when the “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer” setting is set to
“Yes”.
[Selectable items] Under 1ft
A
A
B
A+B
•This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround
A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 29).
•Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to
“EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN
Setup” (vpage 33).
About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both
Surround speakers A and B
If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the
same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
fAudio
hHDMI Control
Select HDMI audio output device.
Make settings for HDMI control function.
[Selectable items] Amp
F Menu tree F
Control
TV
HDMI Setup
GUI menu “HDMI Control”- “Control” is “ON”, the “Amp” and “TV”
will switch with the operation of any television not related to this
setting.
a Color Space
s RGB Range
Setup
Playback
h HDMI Control
Control Monitor
[Selectable items] Monitor1 Monitor2
gMonitor Out
g Monitor Out
OFF
Select the interlocking monitor through the HDMI controls.
d Auto Lip Sync
f Audio
[Selectable items] ON
Connections
Set HDMI control function to ON/OFF.
Manual Setup
Make settings for HDMI monitor output.
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“.
Remote Control
[Selectable items] Auto (Dual)
Power Off Control
aColor Space
Make settings for output color space.
[Selectable items] YCbCr
Getting Started
HDMI Setup
Operating from the main remote control unit
Press the M.SEL button.
RGB
Auto (Dual)
Monitor 1
Interlock with the power off function through the HDMI controls.
[Selectable items] ON
OFF
sRGB Range
[Selectable items] Normal Enhanced
NOTE
Specifications
When “YCbCr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB Range” will
have no effect.
NOTE
•When the “Control” setting has been changed, always turn off the
power to the connecting devices afterwards and then turn back on.
•The HDMI control function does not work when the power to the
equipment is off.
•For details, see “HDMI Control Function” (vpage 74).
Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not
be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either
“Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”.
dAuto Lip Sync
Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.
[Selectable items] ON
Troubleshooting
Make settings for RGB output range.
•When “Monitor Out” is set to “Auto (Dual)”, connections with
the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized
automatically.
•If both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and
“Resolution” is set to “Auto” (vpage 47), the signals are output
with a resolution compatible with both monitors.
•If “Resolution” is set to something other than “Auto”, check the
resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu
“Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor
2” and set accordingly (vpage 57).
•This can be set when “Control“ is set to “ON“.
•Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device
to check the settings.
Information
When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP
compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output
in RGB format, regardless of this setting.
Multi-Zone
Monitor 2
OFF
32
Getting Started
Surround Speaker
Audio Setup
s2ch Direct/Stereo
Select the surround speakers to use.
Make settings for audio playback.
[Selectable items]
A
B
Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.
A+B
Setting
F Menu tree F
Connections
Manual Setup
•This can be set when “Mode” is set to “Analog”.
•This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker
Configuration” – “Surround A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage
29).
Audio Setup
a EXT.IN Setup
s 2ch Direct/Stereo
Setup
d Downmix Option
Playback
g Manual EQ
[Selectable items] 0dB
Remote Control
Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from external
input connectors (EXT. IN).
+5dB
+10dB
+15dB
Multi-Zone
Select playback mode.
Setup when input level is too large and playback volume is distorted.
[Selectable items] OFF
Information
Surround Back Input
Select surround back channel input in combination with the connected
player.
Troubleshooting
[Selectable items] Not Used
SBL/SBR
This can be set when “Mode” is set to “DSP”.
SB(SBL)
Small
Subwoofer
Select subwoofer use.
We recommend setting to “+15 dB”.
Input Att.
Analog
z: Use the same settings as in “Speaker Setup”.
[Selectable items] Large
Mode
[Selectable items] DSP
Custom
Select front speaker size.
Set the subwoofer level for playback.
Select according to the player in use.
aEXT. IN Setup
[Selectable items] Basic
Front
Subwoofer Level
f Auto Surround Mode
To change the settings, select “Custom”.
z
–6dB
This can be set when “Mode” is set to “DSP”.
[Selectable items] Yes
No
Subwoofer Mode
Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.
[Selectable items] LFE–THX–
LFE+Main
Crossover
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range
signal.
[Selectable items]
THX
40Hz
60Hz
150Hz
200Hz
250Hz
80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
Distance FL
Specifications
Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.
[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
Distance FR
Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.
[Variable range] 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
33
120Hz
gManual EQ
Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital sources.
Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer.
[Selectable items] ON
OFF
Getting Started
dDownmix Option
Adjust CH
[Selectable items] Each
[Selectable items]
OFF
500Hz
1kHz
2kHz
4kHz
8kHz
16kHz
[Variable range]
–20dB ~
0dB
~
+6dB
Curve Copy
Copy the Room EQ’s “Audyssey Flat” correction curve.
[Selectable items] Yes
No
Multi-Zone
“Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been
performed.
Information
•The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the
surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals
listed below.
qAnalog and PCM 2-channel signals
wDolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals
eDolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals
rMulti-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM,
DSD, etc.)
•When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does
not change even if the input signal is changed.
250Hz
Remote Control
[Selectable items] ON
125Hz
Playback
Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each
input signal type.
All
Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.
63Hz
fAuto Surround Mode
L/R
Setup
•Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems
distorted.
•When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the
playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.
Connections
Select speaker adjustment method.
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
Troubleshooting
Specifications
34
Getting Started
aNetwork Setup
Network Setup
F Menu tree F
Connections
Manual Setup
Network Setup
a Network Setup
s Other
Setup
d Network Information
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
•If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need
to make the settings at “Setting the IP Address” and “Setting the
Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in the AVP-A1HDCI’s
default settings.
•If the AVP-A1HDCI is being used connected to a network without
the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this
case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult
a network administrator.
•If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and
settings (vpage 21).
•If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP
(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased
your computer.
eUse the ui p button to input the address and press the ENTER
button.
Make settings for wired or wireless LAN.
Make network settings.
Wired LAN settings
Use this procedure to configure the Wired LAN settings.
1
2
Connect the LAN cable (vpage 21).
Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI (vpage 58).
AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the
DHCP function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,
perform the setting in step 3.
3
Set the IP address at the GUI menu “Manual Setup”
“Network Setup” – “Network Setup”.
qSelect “Detail”.
Subnet Mask :
When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly
to the AVP-A1HDCI, input the subnet mask indicated in the
documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input
255.255.255.0.
Default Gateway :
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
Primary DNS Secondary DNS :
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If there are
two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at “Secondary
DNS”.
bWhen connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy”
and press the ENTER button (vpage 38 “Proxy settings”).
Information
Troubleshooting
w Set “OFF”.
r Select “Exit”.
Specifications
qSelect “Detail” and press the ENTER button.
wUse the o p button to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press the i
button.
The DHCP function is disabled.
35
rUse the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button.
Setup is complete.
eInput the address.
•DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) :
These are systems by which the IP address and other network
settings are automatically set for the AVP-A1HDCI, computer,
broadband router and network devices.
•DNS (Domain Name System) :
This is a system for converting the domain names used when
browsing Internet sites (for example, “www.denon.jp”) into the
IP addresses actually used for communications (for example,
“202.221.192.106”).
IP Address :
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network
Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.
CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255
CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255
CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255
Use this procedure to configure the Wireless LAN settings.
1
Fitting a rod antenna (vpage 21).
bIf the access points are not detected automatically, use the i
button to select the “Manual” and press the ENTER button.
Setting becomes manual. For details, see “Manual settings”
(vpage 37).
qSelect “Search”.
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
When no security settings have been used in the Internet
connection settings, this step is not necessary.
[Selectable items]
1
2
3
4
Select the same default key as used for the access point. This
should normally be set to “1”.
tUse the i button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER
button.
Network connection starts.
When connection is established with the access point,
“Connection completed.” is displayed.
Multi-Zone
Select when searching
access points again.
wUse the ui button to select the access point, and then press
the ENTER button.
tSelect “Connection”.
Specifications
qSelect “Search” and press the ENTER button.
The access point you have set is displayed.
AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP
function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,
perform the setting in step 4.
Troubleshooting
e Enter
encryption key.
Information
wSelect the access point.
Example) DENON
eIf there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected
in step w, enter same encryption key as used for the access
point. (If there is no encryption setting, proceed to step t.)
Remote Control
nAutomatic settings
bIf the access points are repeat search, use the i button to select
the “Search” and press the ENTER button.
0~9
Playback
When searching access points to connect automatically, refer to
“Automatic settings”.
When searching access points to connect manually, refer to
“Manual settings”.
a~z
rWhen encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using
the i button, and then press the o p button.
– “Network Setup” – “Network Setup”.
A~Z
Setup
Set the access point at the GUI menu “Manual Setup”
[Characters that can be input]
Connections
Select when access
points cannot be searched
automatically.
Turn on the AVP-A1HDCI (vpage 58).
bIf a LAN cable is connected, remove it.
2
3
Use the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and
press the ENTER button.
Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.
Getting Started
Wireless LAN settings
rSet only during
“WEP” in step w.
36
Getting Started
nManual settings
rUse the ui button to select the Security and press the i
button.
[Selectable items]
Connections
qSelect “Detail”.
wSelect the communication mode.
Example) Infrastructure
Select if not encrypted.
Can also be used even without encryption, through we
recommend encryption for improved security.
WEP
WPA-PSK(TKIP)
WPA-PSK(AES)
WPA2-PSK(TKIP)
WPA2-PSK(AES) :
Setup
Playback
tUse the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and
press the ENTER button.
Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point.
Remote Control
rSelect the
encryption method.
Example) WEP
eInput the SSID.
t Enter encryption key.
Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting
of the access point you are using.
[Characters that can be input]
A~Z
a~z
0~9
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
When no security settings have been used in the Internet
connection settings, this step is not necessary.
Multi-Zone
yWhen encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using
the i button, and then press the o p button.
Information
uSelect “Connection”.
ySet only
during “WEP”
in step r.
qSelect “Detail” and press the ENTER button.
Troubleshooting
wUse the o p button to select the Mode and press the i button.
[Selectable items]
1
2
3
4
Select the same default key as used for the access point. This
should normally be set to “1”.
uUse the i button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER
button.
Network connection starts.
When connection is established with the access point,
“Connection completed.” is displayed.
[Selectable items]
Infrastructure : Select when communication is via an access
point.
Ad-hoc
:S
elect during direct communication, when an
access point is not used.
Specifications
eUse the uio p button to input the name of the wireless
network (SSID) and press the ENTER button.
[Characters that can be input]
A~Z
a~z
0~9
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
37
Set the IP address.
bFor details, see page 35 “Wired LAN settings” in step 3.
None :
4
AVP-A1HDCI performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP
function.
When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function,
perform the setting in step 4.
If you are using a router with no DHCP function to automatically assign
the IP address, set the IP address manually.
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
yUse the uio p button to input the proxy server port number and
press the ENTER button.
uUse the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button.
Setup is complete.
Rhapsody Account
Getting Started
nProxy settings
Set or change Username and Password.
“Listening to Rhapsody“ (vpage 70)
nEnter username : Username
[Input characters]
sOther
Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language
environment.
a~z A~Z 0~9
! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)
Setup
nEnter password : Password
Power Saving
Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.
[Selectable items] ON
[Input characters]
Playback
wSelect “Proxy”.
Connections
qSelect “Detail”.
a~z A~Z 0~9
OFF
! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ˜ (space)
Character
[Selectable items] Auto
Yes
No
If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to
“Latin” or “Japanese”.
eUse the o p button to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press the i
button.
The proxy server is enabled.
[Selectable items]
chi (smpl) chi (trad)
rUse the o p button to select the proxy server input method, and
then press the i button.
fre
ger
por
por (BR)
gre
heb
rus
cze
hun
spa
dNetwork Information
Display network information.
dan
ita
swe
dut
jpn
tur
eng
kor
[Items to be checked]
fin
nor
pol
Wired or Wireless
SSID
DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address
MAC Address
Specifications
ara
The Account Number received is displayed during the 30-day free
trial.
Troubleshooting
Select computer environment language.
[Selectable items]
Address : Select when inputting by address.
nMerge “My Library“ in the trial account with the full account : Merge
Japanese
PC Language
Name
[Selectable items]
: Select when inputting by domain name.
tUse the ui p button to input the proxy server address or domain
name and press the ENTER button.
When “Address” is selected in step r :
Input the address
When“Name” is selected in step r :
Input the domain name
Information
uSelect “Exit”.
Latin
wUse the ui button to set “Proxy” and press the ENTER button.
Clear
Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.
qOn the GUI menu, select “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup”
– “Network Setup” – “Detail” and press the ENTER button.
nClear Rhapsody account :
Multi-Zone
t Input the
address
or domain
name.
y Input the port
number.
To use the web control function, set this setting to “OFF”.
Remote Control
eSet “ON”.
rSelecting the input method.
Example) Address
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
38
Getting Started
Zone Setup
Make settings for audio playback in a multi-zone
system.
Lch Level
Power On Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned
on.
[Variable range] –12dB ~
0dB
~ +12dB
F Menu tree F
[Selectable items] Last
– – –dB
–70dB ~ 18dB
Connections
Manual Setup
The “Lch Level“ and “Rch Level“ can be set when “Channel“ is set
to “Stereo“.
This can be set when “Volume Level“ is set to “Variable“.
s ZONE3
Rch Level
Mute Level
d OSD
Adjust the right channel output level.
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Zone Setup
a ZONE2
Setup
Playback
aZONE2
Remote Control
sZONE3
[Variable range] –12dB ~
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system.
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.
–40dB –20dB
Switch between stereo and mono output.
Automatically convert video input signal to ZONE2 monitor output
format.
[Selectable items] Stereo
Multi-Zone
Adjust low frequency range (bass).
Adjust the main volume level.
~ +10dB
[Selectable items] Full
Video Convert (ZONE2 only)
Volume Level
0dB
~ +12dB
Channel
Bass
[Variable range] –10dB ~
0dB
Mono
[Input source]
DVD HDP
TV/CBL
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items] Variable
–40dB
SAT
ON
VCR
DVR-1
0dB
Information
Volume Limit
dOSD
Adjust high frequency range (treble).
Make a setting for maximum volume.
Set ZONE2 monitor as onscreen display Zone.
0dB
~ +10dB
Troubleshooting
HPF
When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies,
distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to
“ON”.
Specifications
[Selectable items] ON
39
OFF
[Selectable items] OFF
V.AUX
OFF
Treble
[Variable range] –10dB ~
DVR-2
–20dB –10dB
0dB
[Selectable items]
This can be set when “Volume Level“ is set to “Variable“.
ZONE2
: Display only ZONE2 operations.
ZONE2/ZONE3 : Display ZONE2 and ZONE3 operations.
NOTE
On-screen display appears only on the ZONE2 monitor.It does not
appear on the ZONE3 monitor.
Make various other settings.
aPre-out Assign
Getting Started
Option Setup
Change the pre-out assignment.
Setting “Free Assign” allows you to freely assign each pre-out to any channel, depending on the environment used.
F Menu tree F
[Selectable items] Normal
Free Assign
Connections
Manual Setup
Option Setup
Preout terminal
a Pre-out Assign
s XLR Out Polarity
f Volume Control
Normal
h GUI
FR
C
SL (A)
SR (A)
SL (B)
SR (B)
SBL
SBR
SW1
SW2
SW3
FL
FL
FR
C
SL (A)
SR (A)
SL (B)
SR (B)
SBL
SBR
SW1
SW2
SW3
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FL
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
SL (A)
k Trigger Out 1
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
SR (A)
l Trigger Out 2
A0 Trigger Out 3
Free Assign
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SL (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SR (B)
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
SBL
A2 Transducer Setup
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
SBR
A3 Digital Out
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
A4 Remote ID
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
A5 2Way Remote
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
Multi-Zone
A1 Trigger Out 4
A8 Maintenance Mode
A9 Firmware Update
•Channels that are set up in the GUI menu “Speaker Setup”-“Speaker Configuration” to “None” can be set up, but will not generate output.
•Pre-out terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3 can not be allocated.
•One channel can be assigned to up to 4 pre-out terminals.
Information
A6 Dimmer
A7 Setup Lock
Remote Control
j Quick Select Name
Playback
g Source Delete
FL
Setup
d POA Setting
Pre-out Assign
Troubleshooting
S0 Add New Feature
Specifications
40
Getting Started
sXLR Out Polarity
Set to switch the XLR pre-out terminal polarity.
POA 1/POA 2
Mute Level
Set POA-A1HDCI for which the MODE select switch is set to “1” or
“2”.
This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute
mode is set in the MAIN ZONE.
[Selectable channels]
Front L Front R Center
Surround A L Surround A R
Connections
Surround B L Surround B R Surround Back L
Surround Back R
Subwoofer 1
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Subwoofer 3
qGROUND
wHOT
eCOLD
[Selectable items] XLR
XLR (INV)
Subwoofer 2
qGROUND
wCOLD
eHOT
[Selectable items] Full
See the POA-A1HDCI operating instructions.
nInput Selector
gSource Delete
Select the setup channel.
[Selectable items] L1
R1
L2
R2
L4
R4
L5
R5
L3
R3
Select the connector input to be used for each channel.
[Selectable items] RCA
XLR
OFF
L3/L4
L5/R5
Multi-Zone
Set when connecting the receiver to a POA-A1HDCI.
NOTE
POA LINK
Information
Set when connecting the receiver to a POA-A1HDCI through a
CONTROL LINK.
[Selectable items] OFF
R1/R2
R3/R4
hGUI
Set the power amp usage for each channel.
[Selectable items] NORMAL
BI-AMP
BRIDGE (BTL)
Make screensaver settings.
Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen.
When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity
for about 3 minutes.
Check CONTROL LINK.
ON (Single) ON (Dual)
Troubleshooting
fVolume Control
[Selectable items] ON
Set the MAIN ZONE volume setting.
Change the GUI background.
Make a setting for maximum volume.
Specifications
[Selectable items] Picture
–20dB –10dB
Black
Gray
Blue
0dB
Format
Power On Level
Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.
This sets the volume set when the MAIN ZONE’s power is turned
on.
41
OFF
Wall Paper
Volume Limit
[Selectable items] Last
Make GUI related settings.
Screensaver
LINK Check
[Selectable items] OFF
Delete
•Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
•Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu
“Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit
or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.
nPower Amp
[Selectable items] L1/L2
Remove input sources that are not used from the display.
[Selectable items] ON
Select the setup channel.
dPOA Setting
–40dB –20dB
– – –dB
–80dB ~ 18dB
[Selectable items] NTSC
PAL
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor
is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure
described below to change the video format.
b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting.
Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to
the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI monitor, etc.
For details about the trigger out function, see page 23.
When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger out turns
on.
lTrigger Out 2
This is effective when the “MAIN ZONE” has been set to “ON” for
the “Setting with Respect to the Zone” and the input source which is
set to “ON” has been selected for the “Setting with Respect to the
Input Source”.
This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same
way as “Trigger Out 1” above.
A0Trigger Out 3
This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 4, in the same
way as “Trigger Out 1” above.
OFF
[Selectable items] ON
Master Volume
–––
The Transducer Setup can be accessed through GUI menu “Speaker
Setup” – “Subwoofer Setup” is “1SP”, “2SP L/R” or “2SP MIX”. The
transducer signal is outputted from “SW3”.
Setting with Respect to the Zone
[Selectable items] ON
Level
When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.
[Variable range]
–12dB ~ 0dB
OFF
NET/USB / iPod / Tuner
Setting with Respect to the Input Source
This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation
is performed.
When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on.
30s
10s
OFF
Change “Quick Select” display name.
Up to 16 characters can be input.
[Input characters]
OFF :
Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at
“Setting with Respect to the Zone”.
Turn the transducer output off.
Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode
When you adjust “Level”, the adjusted value is set for all surround
modes. To adjust the level for individual surround modes, use “Channel
Level” (vpage 75).
When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns
on.
LPF
This is effective when the “MAIN ZONE” has been set to “ON” for
the “Setting with Respect to the Zone” and the input source which is
set to “ON” has been selected for the “Setting with Respect to the
Input Source”.
Set the upper limit of the low frequency output to the transducer.
Specifications
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
Set the transducer level.
[Selectable items]
40Hz
60Hz
80Hz
150Hz
200Hz
250Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
Troubleshooting
jQuick Select Name
~ +12dB :
Information
[Selectable items] Always
Multi-Zone
Master volume display during adjustment.
Remote Control
[Selectable items] ON
Set when using transducer.
A1Trigger Out 4
Text information display.
A2Transducer Setup
Playback
Text
Setup
This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 3, in the same
way as “Trigger Out 1” above.
Connections
q Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least 3
seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the o p button to make the setting.
e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the
setting.
Setting with Respect to the Monitor
kTrigger Out 1
Getting Started
Operating from the main unit
120Hz
42
Getting Started
A3Digital Out
A6Dimmer
A8Maintenance Mode
Set usage of OPT4 OUT.
Adjust display brightness of the receiver.
This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson
or installer. (For professional use only.)
[Selectable items] ZONE4 Select Rec Select
Connections
NOTE
The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to “Rec
Select”.
[Selectable items] Bright
Dim
Operating from the main unit
Dim
Setup
OFF
A4Remote ID
Playback
Remote Control
[Selectable items]
1
2
3
4
Multi-Zone
•When changing the remote ID, also change the AMP, iPod, TU and
NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time
(vpage 80).
•When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control
unit at the same time (vpage 85).
OFF
Press the DIMMER button.
Bright
Set remote control ID.
Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the receiver.
Dark
This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the
AVP-A1HDCI’s status and make settings via the Internet.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or
installer.
Dark
A9Firmware Update
If POA-A1HDCI is connected using the control link, POA-A1HDCI
meter operation is turned OFF when the AVP-A1HDCI display is
turned “OFF”.
If POA-A1HDCI is connected using the control link, POA-A1HDCI is
updated simultaneously with update of AVP-A1HDCI.
A7Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent change.
[Selectable items] ON
Update the firmware of the receiver.
OFF
Check for Update
You can check for firmware updates. You can also check approximately
how long it will take to complete an update.
Start
Information
A52Way Remote
Set when using the 2-way remote control unit.
[Selectable items] Used
Not Used
Troubleshooting
When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI,
sold separately), set this to “Used”.
NOTE
Specifications
•When using the 2-way remote control unit, connect to the Port 1
RS-232C connector.
•If GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote”is
set to “Used”, you cannot use port 1 of the RS-232C terminal for the
external controller.
43
•When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can
no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you
attempt to operate related buttons.
⋅ GUI menu operations
⋅ RESTORER
⋅ Night Mode
⋅ Parameter
⋅ Room EQ
⋅ Channel Level
⋅ Audio Delay
•To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the
“Setup Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”.
Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI
screen is shut down.
The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed during the
update process.
When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
bIf the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network
environment, then update again.
Display
Updating failed
Login failed
Server is busy
Connection fail
Description
Updating failed.
Failure to log into server.
Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Failure connecting to server.
Display the new functions which can be purchased for downloading
to the AVP-A1HDCI and upgrade.
Manual Setup
Language
[Selectable items] English
Français
Operating from the main unit
b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting.
q Press and hold the AUDIO DELAY and RETURN buttons for at least
3 seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”.
e Use the o p button to make the setting.
r Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the
setting.
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Execute the upgrade process.
When upgrading starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI
screen is shut down.
The amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed during
the upgrade process.
When upgrading is complete the power indicator becomes green and
normal status is resumed.
F Menu tree F
Playback
Upgrade
Select the language displayed on the GUI screen.
Setup
When “Not Registered” is displayed on the Add New Feature screen,
you cannot upgrade.
To use the upgrade function, you should purchase an upgrade package
from the DENON website.
To purchase the package, you will need the ID number shown on this
screen.
To display the ID number on the screen, hold the p and STATUS
buttons on the main unit down for 3 seconds or more.
•In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection. For
details, see pages 35 ~ 38.
•Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.
•Normally there is no need to use this function, aside from the cases
described below.
⋅ Firmware Update : In the case of applying the latest firmware
updates (free)
⋅ Add New Feature : In the case of future upgrades to add new
functions to the receiver (payment required)
⋅ Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add
New Feature” will be announced on the DENON web site each
time related plans are defined.
•Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately
1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure to be
completed.
Once updating/upgrading starts, normal operations on the
AVP-A1HDCI cannot be performed until updating/upgrading is
completed.
Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the
backup data for the parameters, etc., set for the AVP-A1HDCI.
•When updating/upgrading the firmware, we recommend using
wired connections (Ethernet cable).
Language
Connections
When you purchase a new function and register your user information,
“Registerd” is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the
upgrade.
Upon completion of the upgrade, you can start using the new
function.
Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and
“Add New Feature”
Getting Started
S0Add New Feature
bIf the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those
in “Firmware Update” will appear on the display.
Troubleshooting
Upgrade Status
A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be
displayed.
Specifications
44
Getting Started
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
Source Select
Connections
Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings
related to playing input sources.
Setup
Input Source Selection
GOperation on the main unitH
Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob.
bIf “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected, press the SOURCE
button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.
GOperation on the main remote control unitH
Press the SOURCE SELECT button.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
(Main unit)
Information
NET/USB
XM
Troubleshooting
HD Radio
s Auto Preset
d Preset Skip
(Main remote control unit)
k Source Level
PHONO
g Video
•To operate the AVP-A1HDCI using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 77 “Remote
Control Unit Operations”).
•Pressing the DVD/HDP button and the VCR/DVR button on the main
remote control will switch between the following.
DVD/HDP :
DVR-2
V.AUX
a Play
j Rename
DVD
TV/CBL
TUNER
h Input Mode
TUNER
HDP
Source Select
g Video
Source Select
CD
F Menu tree F
f Preset Name
F Menu tree F
PHONO
Settings Related to Playing
Input Sources
DVD
HDP
DVR-1
j Rename
k Source Level
l Input Att.
CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR-1, DVR-2, V.AUX
a Playz
A0 Playback Mode (iPod)z
VCR/DVR :
VCR
h Input Mode
DVR-2
A1 Assign
g Video
h Input Mode
j Rename
k Source Level
l Input Att.
NET/USB
Specifications
a Play
A2 Playback Mode
A3 Still Picture
g Video
h Input Mode
j Rename
k Source Level
45
Set the preset memories that you do not want to display
when tuning.
XM
a Play
d Preset Skip
A~G
NOTE
Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.
g Video
[Input source]
h Input Mode
j Rename
HD Radio
HD Radio
2
[Selectable items] All
1
[Selectable items] ON
Skip
3
XM
4
5
6
7
8
s Auto Preset
f Preset Name
h Input Mode
A1 ~ G8
Select the preset memory number.
HD Radio
[Input source]
The playback screen is displayed.
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
[Input source]
HD Radio
(
iPod
)
V.AUX
OFF
NOTE
•For optimum video performance, THX recommends that you set
the conversion mode to “OFF” to use video signals pass through
system without up conversion.
Example: View video input from a component video on the
component video monitor.
•When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some
other source is input, the video conversion function might not
operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to “OFF”.
i/p Scaler
[Selectable items] A to H
A to H & H to H
OFF
Setting the video source.
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
HD Radio
[Selectable items] Start
Video Select
Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.
[Selectable items]
DVD HDP
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired
station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
SOURCE
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR DVR-1 DVR-2 V.AUX
•This can not be set when “Video Convert“ is set to “OFF”.
•The “A to H & H to H” can be set to the input source assigned to the
HDMI input connector.
•“A to H & H to H” setting:
• Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.
• The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s
resolution signals are input.
46
Specifications
sAuto Preset
TUNER
DVR-2
Make settings for i/p scaler function.
gVideo
[Input source]
DVR-1
Information
TUNER
aPlay
VCR
Troubleshooting
z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources
for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
SAT
Multi-Zone
Assign name to a preset memory.
Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
k Source Level
TV/CBL
[Selectable items] ON
fPreset Name
j Rename
XM
[Input source]
DVD HDP
g Video
NET/USB
Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.
Remote Control
When set to “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory
blocks (A to G).
d Preset Skip
Playback
Video Convert
a Play
TUNER
•It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
•When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of
another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.
•Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”
cannot be selected.
Setup
k Source Level
TUNER
Connections
A4 Antenna Aiming
Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob
until the desired picture appears.
bTo cancel, press the main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button, then turn
the main unit’s SOURCE SELECT knob and select “SOURCE”.
Getting Started
Operating from the main unit
dPreset Skip
Source Select
Getting Started
Resolution
Aspect
Set resolution for video signal output to HDMI.
This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or 480p/576p
input signals from the HDMI output connector.
[Selectable items]
Auto
480p/576p
1080i
720p
1080p
1080p:24 Hz
[Input source]
Connections
DVD HDP
Operating from the main unit
480p / 576p
Setup
1080p:24 Hz
1080p
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
[Selectable items] Full
1080i
Normal
720p
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
•This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than
“OFF”.
•When the “i/p Scaler” is set to “A to H & H to H”, the resolutions can
be setup to the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal.
•To enjoy 1080p/24 Hz video images, use a monitor which supports
1080p/24 Hz video signals.
•With film source (24 Hz), you can enjoy a film-like image. It is
recommended that you use 1080p/60 Hz for video source and mixed
source.
•It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal to 1080p/24 Hz. It is output
at a resolution of 1080p/50 Hz.
•It is not possible to convert a 1080p/60 Hz signal to 1080p/24 Hz.
Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source.
The selectable input modes depend on the input source and
“Assign” setting (vpage 48, 49).
[Input source]
Information
Select optimum progressive mode for video material.
[Input source]
Troubleshooting
[Selectable items] Auto
DVR-2
V.AUX
Video1 Video2
[Input source]
NET/USB XM
[Selectable items] Auto
(
iPod
HDP
TV/CBL SAT
VCR
PCM
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
DTS
•This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital”.
•Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.
)
HD Radio
jRename
EXT. IN
Change the display name for this source.
Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
[Input source]
CD
DVD HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
Specifications
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
DVD
Set the input mode for this source.
EXT. IN
DVR-1
CD
[Selectable items] Auto
Input Mode
[Selectable items] Analog
VCR
z1:This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” (vpage 48). Excluding CD
and TUNER.
z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 48).
Set the decode mode for this source.
Progressive Mode
SAT
Analog
hInput Mode
PHONO
TV/CBL
Digital z2
Decode Mode
TUNER
[Input source]
HDMI z1
Auto
EXT. IN
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
DVD HDP
Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button
on the main remote control unit.
NET/USB
Press the SCALE button.
Auto
TV/CBL
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
[Selectable items]
Auto
HDMI
Digital
Analog
EXT. IN
When a digital signal is properly input, the “
” indicator lights on
the display. If the “
” indicator does not light, check the digital input
connector assignment and the connections.
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
kSource Level
Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio
input.
[Variable range] –12dB ~
0dB
~ +12dB
For input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” are set at the GUI
menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level
can be set separately.
47
A1Assign
Set when replay sound is distorted because the input level is too
large.
Assign input sources to input connectors.
[Selectable items]
OFF
–6dB
[Input source]
HDMI
CD
Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.
V.AUX
[Input source]
DVD HDP
TV/CBL
VCR
2
DVR-1
3
4
DVR-2
5
V.AUX
6
None
CD DVD HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
Make settings for shuffle mode.
DVD
HDMI1
HDP
HDMI2
TV/CBL
None
SAT
HDMI3
Input source
Default setting
VCR
HDMI4
DVR-1
HDMI5
DVR-2
HDMI6
V.AUX
None
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
[Selectable items] Songs Albums
OFF
Optical1 ~ 5
DENON LINK z BNC1/2
None
z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been
connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”.
Input source
Default setting
CD
DVD
HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
Coaxial 4 Coaxial 1 Coaxial 2 Optical 1 Coaxial 3
Input source
Default setting
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
Optical 4 Optical 2 Optical 3 Optical 5
NOTE
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
Component
Select component video input to assign to this source.
[Input source]
DVD HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
[Selectable items] 1 ~ 5 – RCA
DVR-1
6 – BNC
DVR-2
V.AUX
None
Input source
Default setting
DVD
1-RCA
HDP
2-RCA
TV/CBL
3-RCA
SAT
4-RCA
Input source
Default setting
VCR
None
DVR-1
5-RCA
DVR-2
None
V.AUX
None
NOTE
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
48
Specifications
This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned
at the “iPod dock” setting.
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
Coaxial1 ~ 4
Troubleshooting
CD DVD HDP
• With an HDMI connection, video and audio signals are transmitted
simultaneously. To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI”
combined with the audio signal assigned at “Digital”, select “Digital”
at the GUI menu “Source Select“ – “Input Mode” (vpage 47).
•When the AVP-A1HDCI and monitor are connected with an HDMI
cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal
playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
•The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors
are not output to the monitor.
NOTE
[Input source]
DVR-2
Information
Shuffle
DVR-1
Multi-Zone
V.AUX
VCR
Remote Control
Input source
Default setting
Make settings for repeat mode.
[Input source]
SAT
Playback
Repeat
TV/CBL
Setup
Make settings for iPod playback.
DVD HDP
[Selectable items]
SAT
[Selectable items] 1
A0Playback Mode (iPod)
Select digital input connector to assign to this source.
Connections
“Input Att.” is effective during DSP processing of analog audio
signals.
Getting Started
Digital
lInput Att.
Getting Started
Analog
Select the analog connector using the CD input.
[Input source]
CD
[Selectable items]
RCA
Connections
qGROUND
wHOT
eCOLD
XLR Setup
Playback
XLR (INV)
qGROUND
wCOLD
eHOT
Remote Control
When you assign “iPod dock,” you cannot select “XLR”, or
“XLR(INV)”.
iPod dock
Make settings for still picture (JPEG) playback.
[Input source] NET/USB
[Input source] NET/USB
USB Select
Slide Show
Select USB port to use.
Make slideshow settings.
[Selectable items] Front
Rear
[Selectable items] ON
Multi-Zone
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR-1
DVR-2
V.AUX
Information
[Selectable items] Assign
Troubleshooting
•With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used
connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
•Even if “iPod dock” is set to “Assign”, if the set is not connected to
a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal
input source.
5s
~
60s
Make settings for repeat mode.
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
[Selectable items] ON
A4Antenna Aiming
Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity.
OFF
[Input source]
XM
Satellite
Direct Play
None
Set the playback time per image.
[Variable range]
Make random mode settings.
[Input source]
OFF
Interval
Match the port to be used and the setting.
Random
Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.
Specifications
49
A3Still Picture
Make settings for “NET/USB” playback.
Repeat
NOTE
CD DVD HDP
A2Playback Mode
Indicate satellite signal strength.
Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub
remote control unit.
Terrestrial
[Selectable items] Favorites
Indicate terrestrial signal strength.
All Music
Display
¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡
¡¡
¡
Condition
Signal strength is strong
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is marginal
Signal strength is weak
No signal
Dolby
Digital
Source
Surround Mode
DTS
Surround
Source
[Selectable items]
PLg CINEMA
Pro Logic
NEO:6 CINEMA
Playing Multi-channel Sources
(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)
HOME THX CINEMA :
[Selectable items] DOLBY PLg
DOLBY PLgx
or DOLBY PLg
DTS NEO:6
neural
:The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx or
DOLBY PLg for playback.
Cinema
:This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
:This mode is suited for music sources.
Game
:This mode is suited for games.
Pro Logic :This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can
be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg
decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY
PL” is displayed.
Operating from the main unit
The “Cinema”, “Music”, or “Game” modes can be directly selected
with the CINEMA, MUSIC or GAME button on the main unit.
For details, see page 95.
DTS NEO:6
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
Cinema
:This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
:This mode is suited for music sources.
Operating from the main unit
Standard Playback
The “Cinema” or “Music” modes can be directly selected with the
CINEMA button or MUSIC button on the main unit.
To select these surround modes pressing the STANDARD button on
the main unit or press the STD button on the main remote control unit.
The mode switches each time the button is pressed.
neural
:It is possible to play analog input signals and
PCM (2-channel, 48kHz or less) in the surround
mode.
This is the optimum mode for playing sources
recorded in XM HD Surround (vpage 92).
Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes
at GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” –
“Mode” (vpage 52).
50
Specifications
This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound according
to the program source.
Troubleshooting
Press the HOME THX CINEMA button on the main unit or the THX
button on the main remote control unit.
:The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for
playback.
Information
This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format
and playing THX surround sound.
The display when the HOME THX CINEMA mode is selected depends
on the input signal and surround back output playback mode.
z1:This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”
and the AVP-A1HDCI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.
z2:This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.
nWhen not using a surround back speaker
Multi-Zone
[Selectable items]
DVDAudio,
SACD
neural
Remote Control
PLgx CINEMA
[Selectable items] DOLBY PLgx DTS NEO:6
Playback
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources
nWhen using a surround back speaker
Setup
THX surround sound mode to recreate the authentic sound of
movie soundtracks.
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources
Connections
HOME THX CINEMA
Display
THX SURROUND EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
THX Ultra2 Cinema
(other than 2ch) /
THX Music Mode
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
THX Games Mode
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
THX Cinema
DOLBY TrueHD
PLgx C + THX
DTS (5.1ch) /
ES MTRX6.1 + THX (z1)
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 / ES DSCRT6.1 + THX (z2)
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 / THX Ultra2 Cinema
DTS 96/24 /
THX Music Mode
THX Games Mode
DTS-HD High
THX Cinema
Resolution Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio PLgx C + THX
THX SURROUND EX
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
PCM (multi ch) /
THX Games Mode
DSD (multi ch)
PLgx C + THX
M CH 5.1 + THX
M CH 7.1 + THX
Getting Started
Input signal
Getting Started
Playing Multi-channel Sources
(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)
[Selectable items]
Connections
STANDARD :
This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format
and playing surround sound.
The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the
input signal and surround back output playback mode.
Setup
Input signal
Playback
Remote Control
Dolby
Digital
Source
Multi-Zone
DTS
Surround
Source
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS (5.1ch) /
DTS-ES Discrete
6.1 /
DTS-ES Matrix
6.1 /
DTS 96/24
Information
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
DTS-HD Master
Audio
Troubleshooting
DVDAudio,
SACD
PCM (multi ch) /
DSD (multi ch)
Display
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC
DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS+PLgx CINEMA
DTS+PLgx MUSIC
DTS+NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1)
DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2)
DTS 96/24 (z3)
The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are
connected to the PHONES jack while in the STANDARD (DOLBY/
DTS SURROUND) mode.
[Selectable items] DOLBY HEADPHONE
When RECOUT mode is set to “SOURCE”, with this amplifier
signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from
the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder
(vpage 73).
DSP Simulation Playback
The desired mode according to the program source and viewing
situation can be selected from among 9 DENON original surround
modes.
The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 93, 94) to
achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound field.
[Selectable items]
7CH STEREO z1 :This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from
all speakers.
DTS-HD HI RES
WIDE SCREEN
DTS-HD MSTR
:This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of
viewing a movie on a large screen.
SUPER STADIUM
:This mode is suited for viewing sports
programs.
ROCK ARENA
:This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
live concert in an arena.
JAZZ CLUB
:This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
live concert in a jazz club.
MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA
MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN 7.1
Specifications
z1:This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”
and the AVP-A1HDCI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.
z2:This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.
z3:This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”.
For details, see page 95, 96.
Dolby Headphone
CLASSIC CONCERT :This mode is for appreciating classical concert
programs.
MONO
z2:This mode is for playing monaural movie
sources with surround sound.
VIDEO GAME
:This mode is suited for achieving surround
sound with video games.
MATRIX
:This mode lets you add a sense of expansion
to stereo music sources.
z1:Can also be set by pressing the 7CH STEREO button on the main
unit. However, the GUI menu is not displayed.
z2:When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO mode,
the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or right),
so input to both channels.
51
•Press the DSP SIMULATION button on the main unit or SIMU button
on the main remote control unit to switch the surround mode. The
mode switches each time the button is pressed.
•Depending on the program source being played, it may not be
possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try
other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes.
Stereo Playback
[Selectable items]
STEREO :
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
When the main unit’s DIRECT/STEREO button or the main remote
control unit’s D/ST button is pressed, DIRECT mode can be switched
to STEREO mode.
Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode
This is the mode that recreates the original sound most faithfully,
providing extremely high quality sound.
[Selectable items]
DIRECT :
Adjust various audio parameters.
F Menu tree F
Parameter
Audio
DSD DIRECT (z)
MULTI CH DIRECT
M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA
M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC
M DIRECT 7.1
DSD MULTI DIRECT (z)
a Surround Parameters
s Tone
d Room EQ
f Dynamic EQ
g RESTORER
Multi-Zone
DSD (multi ch)
Audio
Remote Control
PCM (multi ch)
DIRECT
Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on
the main remote control unit.
Playback
Analog signal /
PCM (2ch) /
Dolby Digital source /
DTS source /
Other 2-channel digital signals
DSD (2ch)
•To cancel, press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the
PURE button on the main remote control unit.
•When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed
and the display on the main unit is turned off.
•If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in
the PURE DIRECT mode.
•The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT
mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.
Parameter
Setup
Display
Input signal
Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the
PURE button on the main remote control unit.
h Night Mode
j Audio Delay
aSurround Parameters
For details, see page 96.
Mode
Select the mode according to the playback source.
[Selectable items] Cinema
Music
Game
Pro Logic
nIn the DTS NEO:6 mode
[Selectable items] Cinema
Music
The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot
of stereo music.
52
Specifications
nIn the PLgx or PLg mode
Troubleshooting
Adjust surround sound parameters.
The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround modes
(vpage 93, 94).
Information
z: When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the
audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH
DIRECT” is displayed.
Connections
In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high
quality sound.
The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input
signal.
For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back
output’s play mode.
Getting Started
Direct Playback
Getting Started
nIn the THX mode (for 2-channel sources)
[Selectable items]
Surround Back ON Surround Back OFF THX Games Mode
DRC
Dimension
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.
[Selectable items] Auto
[Variable range]
Low
Middle
High
OFF
nIn the THX mode (for Multi-channel sources)
Connections
ES DSCRT ES MTRX 7.1+THX
PLIIx Cinema + THX
Setup
THX Games Mode
THX Ultra2 Cinema
THX Music Mode
Surround Back OFF
This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
D.COMP
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
[Variable range]
[Selectable items] OFF
Delay Time
Low
Middle
High
~
6
0
~
3
~
7
Playback
Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.
Remote Control
Select this when playing analog, PCM or other 2 channel sources.
The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders
shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode.
When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible
software.
nIn the THX mode (for 2-channel sources)
LFE
[Selectable items]
Pro Logic
NEO:6 CINEMA
[Variable range] –10dB ~
Multi-Zone
PLII MUSIC
NEO:6 CINEMA
Information
OFF
Cinema EQ
Troubleshooting
Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.
[Selectable items] ON
OFF
30 ms
~ 300 ms
Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.
[Selectable items] ON
0dB
nIn the DOLBY HEADPHONE mode
[Selectable items]
~
[Variable range] 0 ms
Effect
Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).
PLIIx CINEMA PLII CINEMA
NEO:6 MUSIC
3
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider
sound.
Decoder
PLII CINEMA
~
Center Width
[Selectable items]
THX Surr. EX
0
OFF
Effect Level
For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend
setting to the values below.
•Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB”
•DTS movie sources: “0 dB”
•DTS music sources: “–10 dB”
[Variable range]
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider
sound.
~
0.3
~
1.0
~
10
~
15
0
~
15
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the
surround signals seems unnatural.
Room Size
Specifications
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.
[Selectable items] ON
1
bOnly when the surround mode is “MONO”.
[Variable range]
Center Image
[Variable range] 0.0
Adjust effect signal level.
OFF
Determine size of acoustic environment.
[Selectable items]
Small
Medium small
Medium Medium large
Large
NOTE
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources
are played.
53
Input Channel
Bass
Auto-select surround mode by source.
This function only works for software containing a special identification
signal.
If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES,
it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.
Select channel using external input connectors (EXT. IN) for source
being played.
Adjust bass for all channels together.
OFF
Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag)
ES MTRX
z3
ES DSCRT
z4
DSCRT ON
PLIIx MUSIC
“Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.
[Selectable items] ON
Front
OFF
Adjust each front channel tone.
Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when
playing Super Audio CD.
OFF
OFF
Default
Resets the settings to the default values.
[Selectable items] ON
[Selectable items] Bass
Treble
–6dB ~ +6dB
Surround
Adjust each surround channel tone.
sTone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
Tone Defeat
[Selectable items] ON
[Selectable items] Bass
[Variable range]
Treble
–6dB ~ +6dB
Surround Back
Adjust each surround back channel tone.
OFF
[Selectable items] Bass
[Variable range]
Specifications
Determine whether to use surround back speakers.
Adjust each center channel tone.
Troubleshooting
SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)
–6dB ~ +6dB
Center
[Variable range]
Turn tone adjustments off.
When using the surround back speaker, you can change the “SB
CH Out” setting by pressing the STANDARD button.
[Variable range]
Treble
Information
z1:This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker
Configuration” setting (vpage 29).
z2:This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup”
– “Speaker Configuration” setting.
z3:This can be selected when playing DTS sources.
z4:This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a
discrete 6.1-channel signal identification signal.
[Selectable items] ON
[Selectable items] Bass
Multi-Zone
NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA
z2
[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB
Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN input.
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
[Selectable items]
Adjust treble for all channels together.
Subwoofer Att.
Subwoofer
Select playback mode for surround back channels.
z1
Can be selected when GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup”–
“EXT. IN Setup”– “Mode” is set to “DSP” (vpage 33).
Remote Control
SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)
Treble
Playback
Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback
mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to
“ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLgx CINEMA”.
[Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB
Setup
•When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically
set to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode.
•To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and
“SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON”.
2CH
Connections
[Selectable items] ON
[Selectable items] 8CH
Getting Started
AFDM
Treble
–6dB ~ +6dB
The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT, PURE DIRECT and
HOME THX CINEMA mode.
OFF
54
Getting Started
Subwoofer
Adjust each subwoofer channel tone.
[Selectable items] Bass
–6dB ~ +6dB
[Variable range]
Connections
Setup
•This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other
than PURE DIRECT, DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode.
•When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “ON”, you cannot use the “Tone”
setting (vpage 94).
•“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be
selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed.
•If the settings of the speakers for which “None” has been determined
at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R”
and “Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected and measurements have to
be taken again to include the newly-added speakers.
•When using headphones, “Room EQ” is always set to “OFF”.
fDynamic EQ
Playback
[Selectable items] ON
Select room equalizer for current environment.
Remote Control
[Selectable items]
Audyssey
Multi-Zone
:Optimize frequency response of all speakers to
flat response.
Manual
:Apply frequency response set with “Manual
EQ” (vpage 34).
Information
Audyssey Flat
OFF
Operating from the main unit
•“Dynamic EQ” is displayed when selecting “Audyssey”, “Audyssey
Flat” or “Audyssey Byp.L/R” in the “Room EQ” setup. When set to
“ON”, the “
” indicator is lit.
•When the audio setup measuring results have changed, “
lights.
Troubleshooting
Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the
main remote control.
Audyssey
Audyssey
Specifications
Manual
Manual
When “Audyssey” is selected, “
Audyssey Byp.
Byp. L/R
L/R
Audyssey
Audyssey
Audyssey Flat
” lights.
When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when
the auto setup measuring results have changed, “
” lights.
Mode 2
(RESTORER 96)
•Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media
Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating
signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The
RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon
compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the
original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of
volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio
signals.
•This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input
source is set to “XM”, “HD Radio” or “NET/USB”, or when analog
signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48
kHz) are input.
hNight Mode
gRESTORER
This function restores compressed audio signals to how they
were before compression and corrects the sense of volume of
the bass and treble to obtain richer playback sound.
[Selectable items]
OFF
Mode1 (RESTORER 64)
Mode2 (RESTORER 96)
Mode3 (RESTORER HQ)
The default setting for “NET/USB” and “iPod” is “Mode3”. All others
are set to “OFF”.
55
Mode 1
(RESTORER 64)
“
:Turn equalizer off.
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
OFF
OFF
OFF
:Optimize frequency response of all speakers.
except front L and R speakers.
OFF
About the RESTORER function
Press the DYNAMIC EQ button.
Audyssey Byp. L/R :Optimize frequency response of speakers
During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the
RSTR button on the main remote control unit.
When set to something other than “OFF”, “
” is displayed.
Mode 3
(RESTORER HQ)
Make Dynamic EQ settings.
dRoom EQ
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
Optimized setting for late-night listening.
[Selectable items] OFF
Low
Middle
High
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
Press the NIGHT button on the main unit or the NGT button on the
main remote control unit.
The “
” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is
selected.
OFF
Low
High
Middle
sBrightness
Compensate for mismatched timing between video and audio.
Adjust picture brightness.
Delay audio.
This sets the delay time for audio signals.
[Variable range]
0
~
Getting Started
jAudio Delay
Information
+12
Connections
~ 200 ms
[Variable range] 0 ms
dChroma Level
bThe GUI menu is not displayed when carrying out this setting.
[Variable range] –6
~
~
0
Shows information about current settings.
+6
F Menu tree F
Information
fHue
Status
a MAIN ZONE
Adjust color hue.
Remote Control
s ZONE2/3/4
[Variable range] –6
~
~
0
+6
aMAIN ZONE
Shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.
The items displayed differ according to the input source.
gDNR
Reduces the overall level of noise on the picture.
[Items to be checked]
OFF
[Selectable items]
Middle
High
Select Source
Dynamic EQ
Adjust the picture quality.
Rec Select
hEnhancer
Name Surround Mode Input Mode
Video Select
Night Mode
Room EQ
Information
Picture Adjust
Low
i/p Scaler Source Level
RESTORER etc.
Emphasize picture contours.
F Menu tree F
[Variable range]
0
~
+12
Troubleshooting
Parameter
Picture Adjust
sZONE2/3/4
a Contrast
Shows information about settings for multi-zone.
s Brightness
jSharpness
f Hue
Adjust color definition.
g DNR
[Variable range] –6
h Enhancer
[Items to be checked]
Power
~
0
~
Select Source
Volume Level
Specifications
d Chroma Level
+6
j Sharpness
aContrast
Adjust picture contrast.
[Variable range] –6
~
0
~
+6
Multi-Zone
•This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN (when in analog
mode), DIRECT or STEREO mode (with “Crossover Frequency” set
to “FIXED–THX–”, “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON”
and “Room EQ” to “OFF”).
•The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync
Correction function is activated.
Playback
q Press the AUDIO DELAY button on the main unit or A. DL button on
the main remote control unit.
w Use the o p button to set.
Status
Adjust picture chroma level (saturation).
Setup
Operating from the main unit or the main
remote control unit
•When the input signal is 1080p the “Picture Adjust” setting will be
ineffective.
•Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue”
settings does not affect the HDMI input signal.
•“Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals.
•The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.
•“DNR”, “Enhancer”, and “Sharpness” are each effective with HDMI
output. However, they are ineffective with 480i/576i output.
56
Getting Started
Audio Input Signal
HDMI Information
Quick Select
Shows information about audio input signals.
Shows information about HDMI input/output
signals and monitor.
Shows information about “Quick Select” settings.
F Menu tree F
F Menu tree F
F Menu tree F
Connections
Information
Information
Setup
Playback
Format
Quick Select 1
s Monitor1
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode is displayed.
fs
Quick Select
a Signal Information
[Items to be checked]
Signal
Information
HDMI Information
Audio Input Signal
Quick Select 2
d Monitor2
Quick Select 3
: The input signal type is displayed.
: The input
displayed.
signal’s
sampling
frequency
is
Remote Control
: The number of channels in the input signal (front,
surround, LFE) is displayed.
Multi-Zone
Offset
: The dialogue normalization correction value is
displayed.
Flag
: “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has
undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the
input signal has undergone discrete processing.
Dialogue normalization function
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital,
which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening
level so the user does not have to change the volume control
between Dolby Digital programs. When playing back software
which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see
a brief message in the front panel display which will read “Dial.
Norm X dB” (X being a numeric value). The display is showing how
the program level relates with THX calibration level. If you want to
play the program at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to
adjust the volume. For example, if you see the following message:
“Dial. Norm + 4 dB” in the front panel display, to keep the overall
output level at THX calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume
control by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the playback
loudness is preset, you can choose your preferred volume setting
for best enjoyment.
[Items to be checked]
aSignal Information
The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.
Select Source
Input Mode
Auto Surround Mode setting
Room EQ
Volume Level
[Items to be checked] Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth
For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page
75.
sMonitor1
The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed.
Preset Station
dMonitor2
The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed.
[Items to be checked] Interface
Shows information about preset stations.
Supported resol.
F Menu tree F
Information
Preset Station
Auto Surround Mode
A
B
Shows information about auto surround mode
settings.
The surround mode for which the last memory
function was used for the different input signal
types is displayed.
C
D
E
F
F Menu tree F
G
Information
Auto Surround Mode
[Input source]
[Items to be checked]
Analog/PCM 2ch
Digital 2ch
Digital 5.1ch
Multi ch
TUNER
XM
HD Radio
NET/USB
[Items to be checked] A1 ~ G8
When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status
can be checked on the display.
57
<PHONES>
Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)
MASTER VOLUME
Press [MUTE].
Playback
Turning the Power On
Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON].
AMP]
The sound from the pre-out connectors is automatically cut.
The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the
standby mode.
NOTE
Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.
The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on.
Playing Video and Audio Equipment
To operate the AVP-A1HDCI using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 77 “Remote
Control Unit Operations”).
[POWER ON]
[POWER OFF]
[MUTE]
Operations During Playback
Adjusting the Master Volume
Either turn <MASTER VOLUME> or press [MASTER
VOLUME].
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.
: “Source Select” (vpage 45)
4
Start playback.
(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
58
Specifications
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
qLoad the DVD, CD or other software in the player.
(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
wTo play a video device, switch the monitor input.
(vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.)
Troubleshooting
SOURCE
SELECT
NOTE
Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when the
power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods of
time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power,
or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Prepare the equipment.
Information
MASTER
VOLUME
qPress <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF].
The power is set to the standby mode.
wPress <POWER>.
The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.
1
Multi-Zone
Turning the Power Off
Basic Operation
Remote Control
[
2
Plug the headphones into <PHONES>.
Press <POWER>.
Playback
<ON/STANDBY> <POWER>
Listening with Headphones
Setup
1
To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting
the master volume.
Connections
Preparations
Getting Started
SOURCE SELECT
Getting Started
<TUNING PRESET>
<SOURCE SELECT>
ui
Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts
Presetting Radio Stations
(Preset Memory)
Basic Operation
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can
tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
Connections
1
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
Setup
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the TUNER (
) mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Playback
3
4
Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.
Remote Control
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
[
TU]
(
mode)
Multi-Zone
[BAND]
qTo tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)
Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then
use [d f] to select the station you want to hear.
Information
[A ~ G]
[d f]
[MEMO]
[MODE]
ui
[SEARCH]
Troubleshooting
[CHANNEL]
[1 ~ 8]
[TUNER],
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 45)
2
1
2
3
wTo tune in manually (Manual Tuning)
Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use
[d f] to select the station you want to hear.
Press [MEMO].
Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is
to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select
the preset number.
bThe memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].
4
Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.
•To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
•Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select”
– “TUNER” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 46).
NOTE
Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.
•It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing
[TUNER].
•If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
•When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [d f] to change
frequencies continuously.
•The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”
(vpage 42).
Listening to Preset Stations
Operation on the Main Unit
Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>
to select the preset radio station.
Specifications
(AMP mode)
[SHIFT]
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
59
Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit
nRecalling preset stations from the remote control
unit
1
2
Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block.
Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset
channel.
Auto tuner presets
87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 MHz
B1 ~ B8
520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz,
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
C1 ~ C8
90.1 MHz
Radio Text (RT)
D1 ~ D8
90.1 MHz
E1 ~ E8
90.1 MHz
F1 ~ F8
90.1 MHz
G1 ~ G8
90.1 MHz
RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the
display.
PTY Search
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated
program type (PTY).
For a description of each program type, refer to “Program Type
(PTY)”.
1
2
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
NOTE
remote control unit to the TUNER (
) mode.
Setup
The operations described below using [SEARCH] will not function in
areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Playback
3
4
5
Press [SEARCH] to select “PTY”.
RDS (Radio Data System)
1
2
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
desired program type.
Press [CHANNEL].
PTY search begins automatically.
) mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
4
Press [SEARCH] to select “RDS”.
Press [CHANNEL].
The search for RDS stations begins automatically.
bIf no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the
reception bands are searched.
bWhen a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on
the display.
6
To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 4.
bIf no station broadcasting the designated program type is found
when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME”
is displayed.
5
Specifications
To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.
Troubleshooting
Nostalgia
Jazz
Classical
R&B
Soft R&B
Language
Religious music
Religious talk
Personality
Public
College
Weather
remote control unit to the TUNER (
bIf there is no station broadcasting the designated program type
with the above operation, all the reception bands are searched.
bThe station name is displayed on the display after searching
stops.
Watching the display, press
Information
NOSTALGA
JAZZ
CLASSICL
R&B
SOFT R&B
LANGUAGE
REL MUSC
REL TALK
PERSNLTY
PUBLIC
COLLEGE
WEATHER
ui to call out the
Multi-Zone
PTY identifies the type of RDS program.
The program types and their displays are as follows:
News
Information
Sports
Talk
Rock
Classic rock
Adult hits
Soft rock
Top 40
Country
Oldies
Soft
Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide
the RDS service.
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
Program Type (PTY)
NEWS
INFOM
SPORTS
TALK
ROCK
CLS ROCK
ADLT HIT
SOFT RCK
TOP 40
COUNTRY
OLDIES
SOFT
RDS Search
Remote Control
RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service which
allows a station to send additional information along with the
regular radio program signal.
The following three types of RDS information can be received
with this unit:
Connections
A1 ~ A8
TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements.
This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your
area before leaving home.
Getting Started
Traffic Program (TP)
nDefault settings
bIf no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO RDS” is displayed.
60
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT>
TP Search
<STATUS>
Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic
programs (TP stations).
Connections
1
2
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
Setup
remote control unit to the TUNER (
) mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Press [SEARCH] to select “TP”.
Playback
Remote Control
3
4
uio p ENTER
(
TU]
[
TU]
mode)
(
mode)
bIf no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception
bands are searched.
bThe station name is displayed on the display after searching
stops.
Multi-Zone
5
To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3.
bIf no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been
searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed.
[d f]
Information
Troubleshooting
op
[SEARCH]
[CHANNEL]
(AMP mode)
Specifications
[TUNER]
[NUMBER]
RT (Radio Text)
“RT” appears on the display when radio text data is received.
1
2
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
3
remote control unit to the TUNER (
61
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and
Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service.
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer,
hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite
Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a
one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject
to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with
an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling
1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian
residents). XM Service only available in the 48 contiguous United
States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the
XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your
XM Ready® audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready
to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three
places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM MiniTuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record
the Radio ID below for reference.
) mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Press [SEARCH] to select “RT”.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company, offering
an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in
premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment
programming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to coast.
For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers visit xmradio.
com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800- XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346);
Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).
XM Ready® Subscription
ENTER
uiop
[SEARCH]
[SAT TU]
About XM Radio
XM Ready® Legal
Press [CHANNEL].
TP search begins automatically.
[
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
Programs
bWhile receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast
from the station is displayed.
bTo turn the display off, press o p.
bIf no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed.
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or
“F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-9672346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at
https://activate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438- 9677).
You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the
satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes
10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep
your XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can
access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.
1
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 45)
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
) mode.
Use [d f] to select the channel.
The display will switch as shown below, depending on the
reception conditions.
Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
GOOD” is shown on the display.
Press
<STATUS> until the channel (example:
“XM001”) is displayed.
Press [d f] and select channel 0 (XM000).
The radio ID is shown on the display.
Use o p to select the category, then use ui to select
the desired channel.
Accessing XM Radio Channels Directly
1
2
Press [SEARCH].
Press [NUMBER] then input the channel.
Example: Accessing channel “XM123”:
[1] → [2] → [3]
bIf no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel
automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.
Press ENTER to set that channel.
Reception switches to the selected channel.
Radio ID
The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be
checked at GUI menu “Source Select” – “XM” – “Antenna Aiming”
(vpage 49).
Troubleshooting
•“LOADING” is displayed while channels or data are being received.
• “XM - - -” is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used.
Information
3
Multi-Zone
3
4
5
Status
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is marginal
Signal strength is weak
No signal
2
Remote Control
•The channel switches continuously when [d f] is pressed and held.
•XM Radio channels can be preset using the same procedure as for
FM/AM stations (vpage 59, 60 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset
Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”).
•The artist name, song title, category and reception level can be
checked by pressing <STATUS>.
•The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”
(vpage 42).
display.
GUI
Press o p.
Channel category
<STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the
Display
GOOD
MARGINAL
WEAK
NO
1
Playback
When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist
are displayed.
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
Press
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
Setup
3
remote control unit to the TUNER (
1
2
Either turn
Searching Categories
Connections
2
Checking the XM Signal Strength and
Radio ID
Getting Started
Basic Operation
Specifications
62
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT>
<STATUS>
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations
HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional
FM/AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and
select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
Basic Operation
1
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [DTU] (AMP
mode) to select “HD Radio”.
: “Source Select” (vpage 45)
Connections
Using the HD Radio Receiver
Setup
HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional
broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
•FM sounds as sensational as CDs
•AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
•A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song
title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.
Playback
<ON / STANDBY>
Remote Control
[
NET/DTU]
(
ui
[ iPod]
Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with HD
Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast
programs.
For detailed information on HD Radio technology, please go to “www.
ibiquity.com”.
mode)
[d f]
Multi-Zone
[MODE]
[BAND]
Information
ui
[SEARCH]
[POWER OFF]
ui
[CHANNEL–]
Troubleshooting
[DTU]
(AMP mode)
[iPod]
(AMP mode)
Specifications
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
63
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity
Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the NET/DTU (
) mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
4
Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
qTo tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)
Press [MODE] to select “HD Auto” or “Auto”, then use [d f] to
select the station you want to hear.
•The “
” indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio
station is tuned in.
•When “HD Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio
stations are tuned in.
•If “Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog
stations are tuned in.
wTo tune in manually (Manual Tuning)
Press [MODE] to select “Manual”, then use [d f].
•It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” at step 1 by pressing
[DTU].
•If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
•When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [d f] to change
frequencies continuously.
•HD Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for
FM/AM stations (vpage 59, 60 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset
Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”). In addition, with HD
Radio technology, multicasts can also be preset.
•The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner”
(vpage 42).
The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control Dock for
iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately).
The operation can also be performed using the buttons on the main
unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI menus.
An HD Radio broadcast includes up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to
HD8 and Analog). The different audio programs also have data
programs.
If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1”
is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program, “HD”
is indicated.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
1
qSet the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod.
(vSee the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.)
wAssign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.
Press <STATUS> while an HD Radio broadcast is being
received.
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign”–
”iPod dock” (vpage 49)
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [iPod] (AMP
mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w
above.
OK to disconnect
S
A
Active
buttons
Remote
control unit
(AVP-A1HDCI)
S
S
iPod
A
S
S
Sz
z : Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD1R and iPod.
•With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the
VCR (iPod) connector.
•Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency
components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound.
The default setting is “Mode3”.
•Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF] and set the AVP-A1HDCI’s
power to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also
switch the input source to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock”
is not assigned before disconnecting the iPod.
•Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
•DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod
data.
Specifications
bIf the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be
properly connected. Try connecting again.
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Play”
Tuner presets
C1 ~ C8
D1 ~ D8
E1 ~ E8
F1 ~ F8
G1 ~ G8
Audio file
Video file
(iPod screen)
nDefault settings
B1 ~ B8
Playable
files
(vpage 46)
3
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
Troubleshooting
NOTE
87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /100.1 MHz
101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1
MHz
530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 / 1710 kHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
iPod display
NOTE
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while
“
” and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the
analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the “
” indicator and text may flicker if the station
signal level is weak and unstable.
A1 ~ A8
Main unit display
Information
2
Remote mode
Multi-Zone
The current reception information is shown on the display.
q Normal
↓
w Frequency / Signal strength
↓
e Long station name / Program and Program type
↓
r Title name / Artist name
↓
t Album name / Genre name
Make the necessary preparations.
Display location
Browse mode
Remote Control
Check the HD Radio Reception
Information
Basic Operation
[Display mode]
Playback
If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted, HD1 is
automatically selected after about 20 seconds.
To switch between modes, press and hold down the button.
When remote mode is active, “Remote” is displayed.
Setup
bThe iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not
copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally
permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply
with applicable copyright legislation.
[SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or
more to select the display mode.
Press
Connections
Press [SEARCH] or ui to select the audio program.
4
Getting Started
iPod® Playback
Selecting Audio Programs
remote control unit to the iPod mode.
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
64
Getting Started
uio p ENTER
<STATUS>
Listening to Music
1
2
Use
ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the music file to be played.
Connections
Press ENTER or p.
Playback starts.
•The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by
pressing <STATUS> during playback.
•On the AVP-A1HDCI, folder and file names can be displayed as
titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .
(period)”.
•The time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu
“Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage 42).
To pause
Setup
During playback, press ENTER or [1].
Press again to resume playback.
Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing
Playback
During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i (to
fast-forward), or press [6] or [7].
Remote Control
[ iPod]
Multi-Zone
[8],[9],
[6],[7],
[1],[2]
Information
ENTER
uiop
To stop
During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2].
Playing repeatedly
Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
[CHANNEL +/−]
Troubleshooting
(Main remote control unit)
ENTER
uiop
Specifications
[2]
[8]
[REPEAT]
Shuffling playback
Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] Albums Songs
OFF
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shuffle” (vpage 48)
[1/3]
[9]
Searching up or down pages
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up).
To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
[RANDOM]
To switch between the Browse and Remote modes
Either press and hold [SEARCH].
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor.
(Only for iPod equipped with slideshow or video functions.)
1
2
3
Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode.
“Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVP-A1HDCI’s display.
Watching the iPod’s screen, use
ui to select
“Photos” or “Videos”.
Press
ENTER until the image you want to view is
displayed.
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 48)
[SEARCH]
65
To cue to the beginning of a track
During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track) or i (to
cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9].
Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the
iPod
•“TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings”
must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos
on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.
•When unable to operate by the remote control unit, use the iPod
unit.
GSlide show functionH
This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations or music
or still picture (JPEG) fi les stored on a computer or USB memory
device or Rhapsody.
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can
be displayed while playing the file.
GSlide show functionH
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be
played as slide shows.
The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.
–
–
S
Sz
S
S
Sz
–
S
S
–
S
S
A server or server software compatible with distribution in the
corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
z:Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the
AVP-A1HDCI.
Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a
CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on
the computer’s settings.
bMedia server and USB
•The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2)
standards.
•The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with WMA META tags.
[Playable formats]
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate
Extension
32/44.1/48 kHz
48~192 kbps
.wma
32/44.1/48 kHz
32~320 kbps
.mp3
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
16~320 kbps
.wav
.aac/.m4a/.mp4
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
.flac
Specifications
When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVP-A1HDCI, they are
played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store
in them in the direction in which you want them to play.
S
Sz
Troubleshooting
For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art
is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.
GAlbum art functionH
S
Information
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file
includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the
music files are playing.
S
Multi-Zone
GAlbum art functionH
A USB memory device can be connected to the AVP-A1HDCI’s
USB port to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the
USB memory device.
· Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the
AVP-A1HDCI.
· The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with USB memory devices in
“FAT16” or “FAT32” format.
S
USBb
Remote Control
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored
on a computer (media server) connected to the AVP-A1HDCI via a
network.
With the AVP-A1HDCI’s network audio playback function,
connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies
below.
· Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
· Windows Media DRM10
nUSB memory devices
Media serverb
Playback
nMedia server
Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11
qIf Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either
download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a
Windows update installer.
wDownload the latest version of Windows Media Player ver.
11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update
installer.
b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new
version of Windows Media Player.
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
JPEG
Internet
radio
Setup
•Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the
Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be
tuned in.
The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with the following Internet radio
functions:
· Stations can be selected by genre and region.
· Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
· Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio)
format can be listened to.
· Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an
exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a
computer.
bThe function is managed for individual users, so you must
provide your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com
bThe radio station database service may be suspended without
notice.
•The AVP-A1HDCI’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio
station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a
list edited and created for the AVP-A1HDCI.
When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVP-A1HDCI, they are
played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store
in them in the direction in which you want them to play.
[Compatible formats]
Connections
nAbout the Internet radio function
Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be
played as slide shows.
The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.
Getting Started
Playing Network Audio, USB
Memory Devices or Rhapsody
WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
nRhapsody
Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.
When you first listen to Rhapsody, take advantage of the “30-day
free trial”. When the free trial period has expired, it is necessary to
subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage and
register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details.
www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup
66
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT> ENTER uio p <STATUS>
To pause
Basic Operation
1
During playback, press ENTER.
Press again to resume playback.
Make the necessary preparations.
Connections
q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVP-A1HDCI’s
power. (vpage 21 “Network Audio”)
w If settings are required, make the network settings.
(vpage 35 ~ 38 “Network Setup”)
e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.
Setup
2
Either turn
(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.
Playback
: “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play”
(vpage 46)
Remote Control
[
NET/DTU]
(
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [NET/USB]
3
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
mode)
[A ~ G]
Multi-Zone
[MEMO]
) mode.
ENTER
Use
ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the file you want to play.
Playback starts.
Playing repeatedly
Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
Troubleshooting
[1 ~ 8]
[NET/USB]
(AMP mode)
(Main remote control unit)
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Repeat” (vpage 49)
Playing in random order
Specifications
Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
[REPEAT]
[RANDOM]
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Random” (vpage 49)
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
67
During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.
Searching up or down pages
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up).
To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
Searching by first letter (Character search)
This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens
for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer.
q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice.
w Use o p to select the first letter you want to search for.
If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are
displayed in alphabetical order.
If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
To cancel, press or ui or [SEARCH].
(vpage 77 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Press ENTER or p.
uiop
[SEARCH]
Information
4
5
remote control unit to the NET/DTU (
To stop
The repeat mode and random mode can only be used when playing
tracks recorded in USB/Media Server/Rhapsody.
•Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency
components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound.
The default setting is “Mode3”.
•The time for which the GUI are displayed can be set at GUI menu
“Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB” (vpage
42).
•Use <STATUS> to switch between displaying the title name, artist
name or album name.
•The track display order differs with the server specification. When,
due to the server specification, track display is not in alphabetical
order, character search may not operate correctly.
or p.
ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
The station list is displayed.
.
ui to select the station, then press ENTER or
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station
is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.
1
2
3
While the Internet radio station you want to preset is
playing, press [MEMO].
Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.
[A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired
preset number.
Press
The Internet radio station is now preset.
1
2
3
[MEMO] while the Internet radio station you
want to register is playing.
Press
Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
Press o to select “Yes”.
Setup
3p
Use
Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites
The Internet radio station is registered.
If you do not want to register it, press p.
nListening to Preset Internet Radio Stations
Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8].
1
2
Use
ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
p.
ui to select the Internet radio station, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
The AVP-A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and
playback begins.
nRecently Played Internet Radio Stations
ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
Use
ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
p.
Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want
to clear, then press [MEMO].
Press o to select “Delete”.
The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
NOTE
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
68
Specifications
1
2
ui to select “Recently Played”, then press
ENTER or p.
Use
1
2
3
Troubleshooting
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from
“Recently Played” in top menu.
Information
nClearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites
Multi-Zone
The AVP-A1HDCI automatically connects to the Internet and playback
begins.
nListening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in
Your Favorites
Remote Control
•There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted.
Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less
tendency for the sound to be interrupted.
•“Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is
busy or not broadcasting.
•On the AVP-A1HDCI, folder and file names can be displayed as
titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .
(period)”.
Playback
NOTE
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously
registered setting is cleared.
Connections
1
2
Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER
Presetting Internet Radio Stations
Getting Started
Listening to Internet Radio
Getting Started
Playing Files Stored on a Computer
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
Connections
1
2
Use ui to select “Media Server”, then press ENTER
or p.
ui to select the host name of the computer on
which the music file you want to play is located, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
Setup
3 ENTER
4 ui
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press
ui p ENTER
or p.
Playback
Use
to select the file, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Remote Control
[
NET/DTU]
(
Selecting tracks
Multi-Zone
mode)
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
[df]
•When playing still picture (JPEG) files, files can also be selected
using the operation described below.
During playback, either press [d] (previous file) or [f] (next file).
•Connections to the required system and specific settings must be
made in order to play music files (vpage 21).
•Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software
and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating
instructions of your server software.
•Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
Information
ui p
ENTER
Troubleshooting
(Main remote control unit)
Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in
Your Favorites
Specifications
[USB]
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the
same operations as for Internet radio stations.
NOTE
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
69
•Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
•When the operation described below is performed, the media
server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to
play preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the media server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the media server.
•When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server
name.
Playing Files Stored on USB Memory
Devices
Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the
AVP-A1HDCI.
Basic Operation
1
Make the necessary preparations.
•Set the USB port to be used.
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“USB Select” (vpage 49)
•Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.
2 ui
3 ENTERui
4 ui
Use
to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.
Use
to select the search item or folder, then press
or p.
Use
to select the file, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
•By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used.
•Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
Selecting tracks
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
•When playing still picture (JPEG) files, tracks can also be selected
using the operation described below.
During playback, either press [d] (previous file) or [f] (next file).
•If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
top partition can be selected.
•The AVP-A1HDCI is compatible with MP3 files conforming to
“MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3” standards.
•When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the
USB memory device.
Registering Tracks in My Library
NOTE
•The password should be no longer than 99 characters.
•The password may not contain underscores ( _ ).
Search From Rhapsody Latest Information
Use ui to select the information for track selection,
then press ENTER or p.
After selecting, the information is displayed.
Use ui to select the track, then press ENTER or p.
ui to select “Rhapsody”, then press ENTER or
p.
q When selecting “I have a Rhapsody account”
nUsername :
Use
to select the information or track, then press
Use ui to select “Search”, then press ENTER or p.
Use
ui to select the search item, then press ENTER
or p.
The search display appears.
After selecting, the information is displayed.
Displaying the Track Menu During Play
1
2
Press p during playback.
Use
ui to select the search item, then press ENTER
or p.
bYou can search by artist name, album name or track name.
3
Enter the characters, then press ENTER.
Search From the Rhapsody Internet Radio Station
1 ENTERui
2 ui
Use
to select “Rhapsody Channels”, then press
or p.
Use
to select radio station, then press ENTER or
p.
Specifications
[Input characters]
1
2 ENTERui
Troubleshooting
Enter Username and Password.
Select “OK”, then press ENTER.
w When selecting “Start 30-day free trial”
Select “Accept” then press ENTER.
b To cancel, select “Reject”, then press ENTER.
nListening to Tracks Registered In My Library
Use ui to select “My Library”, then press ENTER
or p.
Information
ui to select “I have a Rhapsody account” or
“Start 30-day free trial”, then press ENTER or p.
Use
The track is entered in the Library.
Multi-Zone
1
2
3
Use
to select “Add to My Library”, then press
.
Remote Control
Preparations
1
2
Use
.
Enter a Character Search For the Track You Want to
Listen to
Listening to Rhapsody
playing.
Playback
3
Press p while the track you wish to register is
Setup
1
2
ui to select “Rhapsody Music Guide”, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
1
2 ENTERui
Connections
•The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the
front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB
memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time.
Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/
USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.
•DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or
damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB
memory device connected to the AVP-A1HDCI.
•USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
•DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate
or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard
disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an
AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.
•It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVPA1HDCI’s USB port using a USB cable.
•The AVP-A1HDCI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.
Getting Started
NOTE
a~z A~Z 0~9
! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜ (space)
nPassword :
[Input characters]
a~z A~Z 0~9
! “ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ˜ (space)
70
Getting Started
Operating the AVP-A1HDCI Using a
Browser (Web control)
This function lets you operate the AVP-A1HDCI using Internet
Explorer.
Connections
1
Switch “OFF” the “Power Saving” setting under
Setup
2
4
When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
you want to operate.
Click when you
operate the setup
menu. (vExample 2)
“Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Other” on the
GUI menu (vpage 38).
Check the AVP-A1HDCI’s IP address with “Manual
Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Network Information”
on the GUI menu (vpage 38).
Playback
Checking the IP address.
Click when you
operate a small screen
such as a PDA screen,
etc. (vExample 4)
5
Click when
you operate
each zone.
(vExample 1)
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Enter the AVP-A1HDCI IP address in Internet
Information
Explorer’s address box.
For example, if the IP address of AVP-A1HDCI is “192.168.11.3”,
enter “http://192.168.11.3”.
Troubleshooting
Entering the IP address.
Specifications
71
Click “v” and select from
the displayed items.
After entering
characters, click “Set”
to set, or click “Def” to
return to initial setting.
Click to change
zone name.
(vExample 3)
Enter figures or click
“<” or “>” to make
the setting, and then
click “Set”.
Operate.
[Example 1] Main zone control screen
Click when you update to
the latest information. (*1)
3
[Example 2] Setup menu screen
Click to
determine a
setting.
Click to perform each
operation.
Changes to each operation
screen.
(vExample 5)
Click to return to the top
menu. (*2)
Click to add a setting to the “Favorites” in your browser. (*3)
*1 : Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time
you operate. When operated from the main unit, click because
the screen is not updated.
*2 : Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in
[Example 3].
*3 : To avoid mistakenly performing menu operations of a zone you
are not operating, we recommend that you register the setting
contents for each zone under Favorites in your browser.
Click the menu from which you want to make
settings.
The display on the right becomes each setting
screen.
Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click
“LOAD” when you want to call settings.
Becomes each operation screen.
[Example 3] Zone name change screen
Click “ON” when
performing Top Menu
Link Setup.
When set up, return to
the top menu from each
operation screen.
(Default setting : “OFF”)
Click when
changing the
background
color of each
operation
screen.
Enter zone
name.
Click to set
zone name.
Click to
return to the
top menu.
SOURCE SELECT Surround mode
INPUT MODE
Other Operations and
Functions
Connections
Select to
operate each
zone.
Getting Started
[Example 4] PDA menu screen
Other Operations
Setup
Playing Super Audio CD
NOTE
Assign “DENON LINK” with the “Digital” setting or
assign “HDMI” with the “HDMI” setting (vpage
48).
[Example 5] Net Audio operating screen
2 SELECT]
[
AMP]
The “
Click the menu from which you want to
make settings.
•When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode,
the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When
playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted
into PCM format, then into analog signals.
• “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel
signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on
the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT
mode.
•The DSD signal may not be output depending on the equipment
that is connected.For further details, refer to the user manual for the
equipment being used.
72
Specifications
•To perform web control, you must connect a web control device
such as a PC to the same network as the AVP-A1HDCI.
•With web control, some network settings, etc., cannot be set.
•When updating firmware, settings made by the web controller may
be reset.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
The “
” indicator lights on the display.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
Troubleshooting
SOURCE
SELECT
When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select
from the displayed characters.
NOTE
We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.
Information
Click to random play.
Click “v” to select the preset channel you want
to play.
Select the surround mode (vpage 50 ~ 52).
Start playing the Super Audio CD.
Click to repeat play.
When registering presets, click “v” to
select the channel you want to register,
and then click “MEMORY”.
” indicator lights on the display.
Multi-Zone
INPUT MODE
Click to stop play.
3
4
5
” or “
Select “AUTO” for the INPUT MODE (vpage 47).
Surround mode
Click when selecting menu.
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [SOURCE
to select the input source assigned in step 1.
Either turn
Remote Control
Click to move up/down the menu
pages.
Playback
1
You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the
PDA menu screen.
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT>
Recording on an External Device
(REC OUT mode)
You can listen to one program source while recording a different
program source.
Connections
1
2
Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>.
“ZONE3 SOURCE” is shown on the display.
Turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE”
Setup
is displayed.
The “
” indicator lights.
Playback
ZONE3 SOURCE
<ZONE2/3/4 / <PHONES>
REC SELECT>
Remote Control
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
ZONE3 TUNER
····
ZONE3 HD Radio
RECOUT XM
····
RECOUT SOURCE
RECOUT HD Radio
Multi-Zone
3
4
Turn
<SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source
to be recorded.
NOTE
•Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should
not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright
holder.
•When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting,
the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, media server,
USB and Rhapsody), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the
digital input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT
connectors.
•Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete”
cannot be selected.
Dolby Headphone recording
When REC OUT mode is set to “SOURCE”, with the AVP-A1HDCI it
is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode
from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate
recorder.
1
The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when
headphones are connected to <PHONES> during
playback in the STANDARD (DOLBY/DTS
Surround) mode.
Play the program source.
5
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage
59).
Information
Start recording.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
When this is done, signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone
mode are automatically output from the recording output
terminals (analog and digital) and can be recorded.
2
Select the parameters and set the desired mode.
Start recording.
Refer to the “Dolby Headphone” (vpage 51).
Troubleshooting
NOTE
Specifications
•To cancel, press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE
SELECT> until “ZONE3 SOURCE” is displayed.
• Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when
the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.
•Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors
are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the
OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.
•Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE3
as well.
•In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE3 mode
buttons cannot be operated.
•When the “Digital Out” setting is set to “ZONE4 Select”, the
OPTICAL4 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output. When
using for recording, set to “Rec Select”.
•Copyright protected network audio (Internet radio, media server,
USB and Rhapsody) signals cannot be output from the digital output
connectors (OPTICAL).
73
Do not disconnect the headphones during recording.
1
HDMI Control Function
)%.*
065
Television compatible with
HDMI control function
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
L
R
bPlease consult the operating instructions for the connected
equipment to check the settings.
bOperations 1 ~ 3 do not have to be repeated once started.
bCarryout Operations 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be
plugged out.
4
5
6
Switch the television input to the HDMI connected to
the AVP-A1HDCI.
Switch the AVP-A1HDCI input to the HDMI input
source and check if the picture from the player is ok.
Put the television power on standby and check if the
AVP-A1HDCI goes into standby.
74
Specifications
If the AVP-A1HDCI does not work please check the following.
•Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”
– “Control” (vpage 32) set to “ON”?
•Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”
– “Control Monitor” (vpage 32) set for the monitor output
connected to television?
•Is the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control”
– “Power Off Control” (vpage 32) set to “ON”?
•Is the control function used for the television HDMI properly set?
(Check the television operating instructions for details.)
•Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking
function may be reset, in which case, repeat Operation's 2 and 3.
• GUI menu “Source Select” – (input source) – “Assign” – “HDMI”
(vpage 48) setting has changed
• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and
the HDMI, or an increase in equipment.
• Change of HDMI monitor output in AVP-A1HDCI setup.
Troubleshooting
R
)%.*
*/
the HDMI and make HDMI available to them.
Information
L
015*$"065
Check the settings for all the equipment connected to
Multi-Zone
Player compatible
with HDMI
control function
the HDMI.
Remote Control
Connections
Put the power on for all the equipment connected to
Playback
NOTE
When using the HDMI control function, do not assign HDMI input to “TV/CBL” by setting “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign” in the
GUI menu.
2
3
Setup
When using these functions set as follows: GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “HDMI Control” (vpage 32).
equipment compatible with the HDMI control
function.
Connections
When connecting the AVP-A1HDCI to a television or player compatible with the HDMI control function, the following operations are
possible.
• Turn power ON/OFF (Synchronize with television)
• Switch to sound output equipment (TV and AVP-A1HDCI)
• Adjust volume
• Switch input source
Connect the HDMI to the AVP-A1HDCI with
Getting Started
Operations
Convenient Functions
Getting Started
<STANDARD> <HOME THX CINEMA>QUICK SELECT
Channel Level
Quick Select Function
You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback
sources or to suit your taste, as described below.
With this function, the currently playing input source, input mode,
surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in
the memory.
Connections
1
2
Press CH SELECT.
Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
buttons is pressed.
Setup
3
Use o p to adjust the volume.
Playback
<POWER>
CH SELECT uio p
b”OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume
is set to –12dB.
1
Set the input source, input mode, surround mode,
room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you
want to store.
2
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT.
Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.
[Quick Select Defaults]
Remote Control
Quick Select 1
Quick Select 2
Quick Select 3
Input Source
DVD
TV/CBL
VCR
Volume
–40 dB
–40 dB
–40 dB
Fader Function
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the front or
rear speakers at once.
Multi-Zone
QUICK SELECT
1
2
3
Press CH SELECT.
Press ui or CH SELECT to select “Fader”.
Information
Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o: front, p: rear)
uio p
Troubleshooting
CH SELECT
Specifications
75
NOTE
Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected
if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option
Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 41). In this case, store them
again.
Personal Memory Plus Function
•The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
•The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted
to the lowest value is –12 dB.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
•To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired
settings were stored.
• The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 42).
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode,
HDMI output mode, Picture Adjust, Audio Delay etc.) last selected
for the individual input sources.
When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically
set to the ones that were set the last time that input source was
used.
The surround parameters, tone control, room EQ settings and the
volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround
modes.
Getting Started
Last Function Memory
This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby
mode was set.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as
they were directly before the standby mode was set.
Connections
Backup Memory
Setup
The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, even if the
power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected.
Playback
Resetting the Microprocessor
Remote Control
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations
cannot be performed.
All settings are reset when the microcomputer is reset.
<POWER>
1
<POWER>
2 <STANDARD>
<HOME THX CINEMA>
3
Turn off the power using
and
Multi-Zone
Press
.
while simultaneously pressing
.
Information
Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1
second, release the two buttons.
Troubleshooting
If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second,
start over from step 1.
Specifications
76
Getting Started
Operating DENON Audio Components
Remote Control Unit Operations
1
Press
operated.
The indicator for the component to be operated flashes.
Connections
:AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 /
SYSTEM CALL
Main Remote Control Unit
Setup
Playback
•On the main remote control unit, the display switches according
to the device being operated and the mode.
•In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between“
”
and “
” each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is pressed.
•In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the remote
ID is set, the AVP-A1HDCI can be used independently even in an
environment containing multiple DENON amplifiers.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
:TUNER (FM/AM) / XM
: iPod
: DVD player (recorder) /
CD player (recorder)
:NETWORK/USB /
DIGITAL TUNER (HD Radio)
: VCR / TAPE
:Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
: TV
Presetting
The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate
devices of various brands.
1
2
3
Press
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
GAMP modeH
GZONE2 modeH
GZONE3 modeH
Remote Control
AMP]
brand of the component to be preset. The numbers
are shown in the Preset Code Table (vEnd of this
manual).
When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator
flashes twice.
When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the
component to which that code belongs flashes.
Signal transmission
indicator
[
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the
bThe mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
preset.
bThe input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10
seconds.
[MODE SELECTOR]
Multi-Zone
Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does
not operate, try inputting a different code.
Information
GSYSTEM CALL modeH
GZONE4 modeH
Operating Preset Components
Troubleshooting
[HOME]
1
[NUMBER]
2
Press
[MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
operated.
The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes.
Operate the component.
Specifications
[RC SETUP]
2
bFor details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Operate the component.
bFor details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment,
some buttons may not operate.
NOTE
The device mode (“
setting is being made.
77
” or “
”) cannot be changed while the
[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,
ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP.
Getting Started
Functions of Buttons by Component
EL Display
EL Display
Device operated
1
8 9
6 7
DVD
(Default setting)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
CD Recorder
VCR
TAPE
iPod
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
CD
(Default setting)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback/Pause
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
DVD Recorder
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
–
Stop
Power on
Power off
Stop
–
–
Stop
–
–
Stop
Power on
Power off
Stop
–
–
Stop
–
–
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
–
–
–
–
–
–
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
–
–
–
SETUP/SEARCH
Set up
Set up
–
–
Set up
–
RETURN
Return
Return
–
–
Cancel
–
CH + / SHUFFLE
–
–
–
–
Switch channels
–
CH - / REPEAT
–
–
–
–
Switch channels
–
0 ~ 9, +10
Special Remarks
Select track
Select track
Select track
Select track
–
q
–
q
Menu
Cursor
Enter
Page forward
screen / Browse/
Remote mode
switching (Press
and hold)
Return
1-track/album
shuffle play
1-track/all-track
repeat play
–
–
Buttons
[0 ~ 9, +10]
q, w
q
Specifications
GSpecial RemarksH
qOnly one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
wThe names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.
NOTE
•Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” (
) mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” (
•Preset a VCR for the “VCR” (
) mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” (
) mode.
Troubleshooting
Pause
Stop
Power on
Power off
Information
Pause
Multi-Zone
3
2
SOURCE ON
SOURCE OFF
Remote Control
Buttons
iPod
Playback
[SETUP/
SEARCH]
[CH + /
SHUFFLE],
[CH – /
REPEAT]
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[RETURN]
VCR
Device Mode
Setup
[MENU]
[1],
[8 9],
[6 7], [3],
[2],
[SOURCE ON],
[SOURCE OFF]
DVD
Connections
[MODE
SELECTOR]
MODE SELECTOR
) mode.
78
Getting Started
EL Display
EL Display
[MODE
SELECTOR]
Connections
Setup
[MENU]
Playback
[SETUP]
MODE SELECTOR
[1],
[8 9],
[6 7], [3],
[2],
[SOURCE ON],
[SOURCE OFF]
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[DISPLAY]
Remote Control
[CH +/–]
[0 ~ 9, +10]
[TV/VCR]
Multi-Zone
Buttons
Information
[MODE
SELECTOR]
Troubleshooting
Specifications
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[SEARCH]
[CH +/–]
[0 ~ 9]
79
Device operated
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
SOURCE ON
SOURCE OFF
TV (HITACHI)
TV (SONY)
SAT
SAT
Punch through
Punch through
Punch through
Punch through
Power on
Power off
Power on
Power off
Power on
Power off
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
SETUP
DISPLAY
CH + / –
0 ~ 9, +10
TV/VCR
Special Remarks
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
Switch inputs
q, e
Power on
Power off
Buttons
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
Switch inputs
q, e
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
–
q, e
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
–
q, e
EL Display
[A ~ G], [d f],
[BAND],
[MODE],
[MEMO]
Buttons
Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
Device Mode
GSpecial RemarksH
qOnly one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
eThe CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the TV, satellite receiver and cable TV mode (vpage 81 “Punch Through
Function”).
EL Display
[SHIFT]
TV
MODE SELECTOR
TU
NET / DTU
Device Mode
Device operated
A~G
d f
BAND
MODE
MEMO
Analog tuner
Preset memory block selection
Tuning + / –
AM/FM switching
Switch search modes
Preset memory registration
NET / USB
Preset memory block selection
–
–
–
Preset memory registration
HD Radio
Preset memory block selection
Tuning + / –
AM/FM switching
Switch search modes
Preset memory registration
–
–
XM
Preset memory block selection
Channel selection
–
–
Preset memory registration
Buttons
Category search
–
u i o p
ENTER
Cursor
Enter, Playback/Pause
Multicast switching (ui)
–
SEARCH
RDS search
Direct search
Search
Multicast switching
CH + / –
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
0~9
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
SHIFT
Switch memory block
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8) /
Direct channel search
(0 ~ 9)
Switch memory block
–
Switch memory block
[
[MODE SELECTOR]
[ iPod]
TUNER
AMP
(MAIN)
Remote ID
NET/DTU
iPod
(Analog
TUNER)
(XM)
52863
52864
(Net
Audio)
(HD
Radio)
72815
62865
62840
81001
2
82001
52795
52812
72816
62837
62841
3
83001
52800
52813
72817
62838
62842
4
84001
52805
52814
72818
62839
62843
Point the main remote control units directly at each
other and press and hold the button on the other
device’s remote control unit that you want to learn.
Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the
signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Other device’s
remote control unit
Setup
1
(Default)
5
NOTE
[RC SETUP]
Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the
AMP mode.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4
5
Press
[TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
•With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the
device will not operate properly even when the signals have been
learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit.
•Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no
longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage
82).
Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order.
NOTE
•[HOME] cannot be learned.
1
2
3
4
Press
set.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning
mode is set.
•Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].
•The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes
cannot be learned.
Press the button to be set.
Specifications
[NUMBER] to
input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote
ID to be changed.
Refer to the table at the right, and use
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
Troubleshooting
1
2
3
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
Information
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room,
make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates.
If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if they
cannot be operated with the preset memory function, their remote
control signals can be transfered to stored in the AVP-A1HDCI’s
main remote control unit.
6
Multi-Zone
Setting the Remote ID
Learning Function
bIf you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5.
bThe mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].
bThe signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if
learning was not possible
Remote Control
[NUMBER]
AVP-A1HDCI’s main remote
control unit (RC-1067)
Playback
•When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the
AVP-A1HDCI’s (vpage 43).
•When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the
“TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time.
•Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” (
), the XM
remote ID for “
”.
Connections
[
AMP]
[
TU]
NET/DTU]
MODE
SELECTOR
Getting Started
Signal transmission
indicator
The main remote control unit’s display turns off.
bIf a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission
indicator lights but the signal is not learned.
be set.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all modes.
80
System Call Function
Getting Started
Signal
transmission
indicator
[
AMP]
Connections
[MODE
SELECTOR]
[SYSTEM CALL]
This function lets you register a series of operations at a single
button.
For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input source
selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s
power turned on and the play mode set all by pressing a single
button.
Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2
or 3).
Setup
Registering
[POWER ON]
Playback
1
2
3
Press
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
register.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
Remote Control
[CHANNEL+/–]
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
[NUMBER]
Multi-Zone
[RC SETUP]
4
5
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system
call registration mode is set.
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to
register the signals.
Press the buttons you want to register in the same
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
[8], [9],
[1],
[6], [7],
[3], [2]
81
sequence as the operations you want to perform.
The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is
pressed.
Example :Press [POWER ON].
↓
Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD].
↓
Press [1].
bThe mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].
bPerform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to
register.
6
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
Calling out
1
2
Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”.
Press
[SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals
were registered.
The registered signals are transmitted in the registered
sequence.
Punch Through Function
CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV or
SAT/CBL mode buttons.
For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to the TV
mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed while in the
TV mode.
1
2
3
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).
4
5
6
7
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).
Press
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch
through setting mode is set.
Press
Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2,
6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).
[MODE SELECTOR] for the equipment (TV or
SAT/CBL) you want to set to punch-through.
Press
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.
Set the light on time.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
1
2
3
4
Press
reset.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press the button you want to reset twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness
The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps.
(Default: Step 3)
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
All settings
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
1
2
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times.
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
reset twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Troubleshooting
3
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Information
Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –].
The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed.
The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed.
reset.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
Multi-Zone
1
2
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
1
2
3
4
Press
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Remote Control
GResetting by device modeH
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
System call function
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
1
2
3
4
Playback
[Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec.
[2] : 10 sec. (Default)
[3] : 15 sec.
[4] : 20 sec.
[5] : 25 sec.
GResetting button by buttonH
1
2
3
4
Setup
3
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight
on time setting mode is set.
Learning Function
Punch-through function
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
reset (TV or SAT/CBL).
Connections
1
2
Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit
Getting Started
Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Specifications
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
82
Getting Started
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations
Connections
Setup
Playback
•The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently used
buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit
operations.
•The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi-zone, so
you can use it to control the AVP-A1HDCI from other rooms.
•The operations listed below can be performed with the sub
remote control unit.
•Switching the input source
•Adjusting the volume
•Tuner (AM/FM), XM, HD Radio and iPod operations
•NET/USB direct play
•GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations
•Zone power on/off
•It is not possible to operate devices other than the amplifier.
Remote Control
[ZONE OFF]
[ZONE SELECT]
[ZONE ON]
Multi-Zone
[SOURCE SELECT]
Information
Troubleshooting
[CHANNEL +/–]
[MUTE]
[MENU]
[uiop]
[SEARCH]
[REPEAT]
Specifications
[RANDOM]
[VOLUME +/–]
[SHIFT]
[ENTER]
[RETURN]
[8 9], [2], [1/3],
[TUNING d f]
[ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES]
[USB]
Functions of Buttons by Component
Zone selection
ZONE SELECT
ZONE OFF
ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / –
DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR-1, DVR-2, VCR,
V.AUX, SAT, CD, PHONO
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
–
SHIFT
–
Device operated
VOLUME + / –
MUTE
MENU
u i o p
SEARCH
8 9,
TUNING d f
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Media server only)
FAVORITES *
Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
–
–
–
–
TUNER
(AM/FM)
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
RDS search
DTU
(HD Radio)
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
Multicast switching (u i)
Multicast switching
–
Tuning
–
Tuning
–
b3
–
b3
–
b3
–
b4
–
b4
–
b4
–
b5
–
b5
–
b5
–
b1:Affects the currently selected zone.
b2:In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
b3:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played.
b4:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the media server are played.
b5:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 49).
DIRECT PLAY button
•Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”.
FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites.
ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder.
•When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device.
NOTE
When the media server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.
83
SHIFT
iPod
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
Preset channel selection
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Page forward screen /
Character search
–
RETURN
8 9,
TUNING d f
2
1/3
–
File operations
–
Channel selection
–
Track search
–
Stop
Play/pause
–
–
1-track/all-track repeat play
–
b3
–
Stop
Play/pause
1-track/all-track repeat play
(USB / Media server)
Random play (USB / Media server)
b3
Song/album shuffle play
b3
–
–
b4
–
b4
b4
–
b5
–
b5
b5
–
–
–
–
–
Troubleshooting
Track search
Information
–
REPEAT
RANDOM
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Media server only)
FAVORITES *
–
Multi-Zone
Direct access of channel
–
–
–
–
–
Remote Control
SEARCH
Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
File operations
File operations
Page forward screen /
Browse/Remote mode
switching (press and hold)
File operations
Playback
Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
File operations
File operations
Setup
VOLUME + / –
MUTE
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
Category search
–
–
NET / USB
Connections
Zone selection
ZONE SELECT
ZONE OFF
ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / –
SAT TU
(XM)
Getting Started
Device operated
Specifications
b1:Affects the currently selected zone.
b2:In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
b3:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played.
b4:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the media server are played.
b5:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 49).
84
Getting Started
Multi-zone indicator
Connections
[ZONE OFF]
[ZONE SELECT]
[ADVANCED SETUP]
Setting the Zone for Which the Sub
Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE
SELECT LOCK Mode)
We recommend always using the sub remote control unit for the
same room. When this is done, the unit can be set so that the
zone does not switch when buttons are operated.
Setup
1
2
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The selected multi-zone indicator lights.
Playback
qTo set to “MAIN ZONE”: Press [REPEAT].
wTo set to “ZONE2”
: Press [RANDOM].
eTo set to “ZONE3”
: Press [USB].
rTo set to “ZONE4”
: Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].
Remote Control
3
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
[RANDOM]
[REPEAT]
Multi-Zone
[ALL MUSIC/
FAVORITES]
[USB]
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
To Cancel
Information
Troubleshooting
1
2
3
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
Press [ZONE SELECT].
Switching Zones
Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by the sub
remote control unit.
Specifications
1
2 SELECT]
Press [ZONE SELECT].
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
While the multi-zone indicator is light, press
to select the zone to be operated.
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
85
[ZONE
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same room,
make this setting so that no AV receiver other than the desired
one operates.
1
While pressing
All the multi-zone indicators light.
[MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected
remote ID flashes.
All the multi-zone indicators light.
Select the multi-zone to be set.
[MENU]
Setting the Remote ID
2
Select the remote ID to be set.
qTo set to 1: Press [REPEAT].
The “M” indicator flashes.
wTo set to 2: Press [RANDOM].
The “Z2” indicator flashes.
eTo set to 3: Press [USB].
The “Z3” indicator flashes.
rTo set to 4: Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].
The “Z4” indicator flashes.
3
While pressing
[MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
NOTE
When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the
AVP-A1HDCI’s (vpage 43).
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
Resetting the Settings
While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are
restored to their defaults.
Getting Started
Multi-Zone Connections and Operations
Connections
Multi-Zone Connections
Setup
•For ZONE2, it is necessary to set in sequence with the signal connected to either the power amplifier or bit stream amps.
The amp should be the power amplifier in the case of ZONE3, and the bit-stream for ZONE4.
•If the signal inputted to ZONE2 is analog, change to PCM(2-channel) signal, and output it from ZONE2 optical output connectors.
Connectors for video output
ZONE2 PRE OUT
Stereo
ZONE2 OPTICAL OUT
Bit-stream
ZONE2 VIDEO OUT,
ZONE2 S-VIDEO OUT,
ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE3 PRE OUT
Stereo
ZONE3 VIDEO OUT
ZONE4
ZONE4 OPTICAL4 OUT
Bit-stream
–
Remote Control
Audio signals
Playback
Connectors for audio output
Multi-Zone
ZONE2
Monitor
MAIN ZONE (7.1-channel system)
Information
ZONE4
Monitor
''-
48
'3
AVP-A1HDCI ZONE2 video
output
Input
Power amplifier
ZONE3 video
output
ZONE2 audio
output
'3
'-
4-
48
$
'3
Troubleshooting
DVD player
$
AV amplifier
or
Power amplifier
$
48
AV amplifier
43
ZONE2 digital output
ZONE3
43
4-
Specifications
Monitor
Remote
control unit
43
4-
4#
-
Power amplifier
4#
3
ZONE3 audio output
ZONE4
digital output
: Video cable
: Audio cable
•When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”.
In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) monaural output is output from
the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as
desired.
•Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
86
Getting Started
SOURCE SELECT <ZONE2/3/4/ REC SELECT> VOLUME
Multi-Zone Operations
Turning the Power On and Off
GOperation on the main unitH
Connections
Press <ZONE2 ON/OFF>, <ZONE3 ON/OFF> or <ZONE4 ON/OFF> for
the zone to be operated.
When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.
GOperation on the remote control unitH
Setup
In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF].
<ZONE2 ON/OFF> <ZONE3 ON/OFF> <ZONE4 ON/OFF>
Playback
[
Selecting the Input Source
AMP]
Remote Control
(ZONE2 mode)
Multi-Zone
GOperation on the main unitH
VOLUME
[MUTE]
[ON]
[ON]
[OFF]
[OFF]
(ZONE3 or
ZONE4 mode)
[MENU]
Information
SOURCE
SELECT
GOperation on the remote control unitH
In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].
Adjusting the Volume
GOperation on the main unitH
(Main remote control unit)
Troubleshooting
Multi-zone
indicator
[OFF]
[ZONE SELECT]
[ON]
SOURCE SELECT
Specifications
VOLUME
[MUTE]
[MENU]
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
87
q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.
w Turn <SOURCE SELECT>.
q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.
w Turn <VOLUME> to adjust.
GOperation on the remote control unitH
In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME].
[Variable range] – – –
–70dB ~ –40dB ~ 18dB
•The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to
“Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)”
– “Volume Limit” (vpage 39).
•The volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 can be adjusted with the remote
control unit.
Turning off the Sound Temporarily
In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press
[MUTE].
The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” (vpage 39).
To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again.
The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
•The source selected for ZONE3 is also output from the recording
output connectors.
•When the [MENU] is selected, it is possible to carryout “Zone
Setup” looking at the on-screen display in ZONE2. Also, when the
“OSD” is set as “ZONE2/ZONE3”, the on-screen display comes on
the ZONE2 monitor when ZONE3 has been operated so it is possible
to operate it looking at this.
ZONE2 MENU
ZONE2 MENU
INPUT :DVD
SIGNAL:ANALOG
VOL. :-40dB
>Bass
Treble
HPF
Lch Lev.
Rch Lev.
0dB
0dB
OFF
0dB
0dB
>Channel
Vol.Lev.
Vol.Limit
P.On Lev.
Mute Lev.
STEREO
VAR
OFF
LAST
FULL
NOTE
•The digital signal from the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are output to the analog audio connectors in ZONE2 and
ZONE3 in the case of PCM (2-channel) signals only.
•Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors
cannot be played in multi-zone.
•“XM” or “HD Radio” cannot be selected with digital output
(OPTICAL) in ZONE2. Copyright-protected Network audio signals
(Internet radio, media server, USB, Rhapsody) cannot be output.
•In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources
with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, media server, USB, Rhapsody)
can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
•When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output
from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.
'-
Other Information
$
4-DI
'3
43DI
Surround back speakers
$
'3
Number of surround back speakers
43DI
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL
G1H For THX surround EX systems
(Using surround back speakers)
qWhen mainly playing movies
Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way
speakers.
Front speakers
Center speaker
Monitor
Subwoofer
60°
Surround
speaker
Surround
speakers
Surround back
speaker
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
Point slightly
downwards
60°
Surround back speakers
GAs seen from aboveH
GAs seen from the sideH
88
Specifications
With THX Surround EX, the surround back channel consists of one
channel of playback signals, but we recommend using two speakers.
The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX (vpage
91) are most effective when using two monopole type surround back
speakers placed close together.
Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the
surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back
channel when listening from a position other than the center.
Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to
arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to
use them.
Troubleshooting
4-DI
Examples of speaker layouts
Information
Speaker(s) for one or two channels are required in order to achieve
a THX Surround EX system with the AVP-A1HDCI. Adding these,
however, allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only
with sources recorded in THX Surround EX, but also with conventional
2- to 5.1 channel sources. The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for
achieving surround sound with up to 7.1 channels using surround back
speakers, for sources recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well
as Dolby Digital 5.1 channel and DTS Surround 5.1 channel sources.
Furthermore, all the DENON original surround modes (vpage 51
“DSP Simulation Playback”) are compatible with 7.1 channel playback,
so you can enjoy 7.1 channel sound with any signal source.
Multi-Zone
48
In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of
conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.
Remote Control
'-
Movement of acoustic image from
SR to SB to SL
Playback
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 5.1-channel systems
4#DI
Setup
The THX Surround EX format adds new “Surround Back” (SB)
channels to the conventional 5.1 channel system. This makes it easy
to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener, something
that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional
multi surround speakers. In addition, the acoustic image extending
between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving
the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the
sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the
listening position.
Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the
sound at the rear. Because of this, the surround left and right channels
play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic
image from the front to the back. As shown on the diagram above, in a
movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally
in front of the listeners, creating an acoustic image as if the sound
were floating in space.
To achieve these effects, we recommend placing the speakers for the
surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than
with conventional surround systems. Doing so sometimes increases
the surround effect when playing conventional 5.1 channel sources in
the THX Surround EX mode. Check the surround effects of the various
modes before selecting the surround mode.
Connections
About Speaker Installation
48
Placement of the surround left and right channels
when using surround back speakers
Getting Started
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 6.1-channel systems
Getting Started
Connections
wSetting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type
speakers for the surround speakers
For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse
radiation speakers such as bipolar (THX) types, or dipolar types,
provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct
radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side
of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.
Front speakers
Center speaker
The AVP-A1HDCI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit
that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve
the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Monitor
Subwoofer
45° ~ 60°
Surround
speaker A
Surround
speaker A
Path of the surround sound from the
speakers to the listening position
Surround
120°
Surround back
speaker
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
Setup
Point slightly
downwards
Surround
speaker B
Playback
Surround
speaker
Surround
speakers
Surround back
speaker
Remote Control
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
Surround back
speaker
Surround speaker B
GAs seen from aboveH
Point slightly
downwards
GAs seen from the sideH
G2H When not using surround back speakers
Front speakers
Center speaker
60°
Multi-Zone
GAs seen from the sideH
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
eWhen playing movies and music
To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music, we
suggest that during setup, choose Dolby Digital/DTS with THX and
Surround Speakers A (the bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at
the sides of the listening position).
Choose Dolby Digital/DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B
(the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the
listening room). Then, by simply activating the THX function (used
during movie playback, the Surround A speakers are automatically
activated. For multi-channel music listening (Dolby Digital or DTS
music programs), turn off the THX enhancements by touching the
THX button on the remote control, and the Surround B speakers
will be automatically activated.
Example: Movie sources (Dolby, DTS Surround, etc.)
“THX” or “THX Cinema” mode … Speakers A
Music sources (DVD video, DTS CD, etc.)
“Dolby/DTS Surround” … Speakers B
The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning
HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing
multi-channel music.
89
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and
“C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for
low frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved.
A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing
movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital Plus
Surround back speakers
GAs seen from aboveH
Dolby Surround
Monitor
Subwoofer
60°
Surround speaker
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
120°
Surround speakers
GAs seen from aboveH
GAs seen from the sideH
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It
is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers
greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions
of the playback equipment.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce
the sound of the studio master.
This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96
kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly
prioritizing sound quality.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the
conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible
with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels
of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides
high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional
products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel
data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby
Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY
DIGITAL SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by Dolby
Laboratories and Lucas Films.
The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide
improved sound positioning and expression of space.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround
sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel
audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
bSources recorded in Dolby Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS
NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC”
suited for playing music.
Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following
logo marks.
Dolby Surround support mark :
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because
film soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization
restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a movie soundtrack
in a normal home environment.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
90
Specifications
Dolby Digital EX
Re-EQ™ (Re-Equalization)
Troubleshooting
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by
the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX
grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of
the film soundtrack, in both movie theaters and in your home theater,
as faithful as possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing
stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with
similar equipment and conditions. The soundtrack created for movie
theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape,
DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theater
environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate
the sound from the movie theater environment into the home, correcting
the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On the AVP-A1HDCI, when the
Home THX Cinema mode is on, THX post-processing is automatically
added after the Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS decoder:
Information
DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible
with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology
faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully
compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS
digital surround 5.1-channel data.
Home THX Cinema Surround
Multi-Zone
This is a three-dimensional sound technology developed jointly by
Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd. of Australia for achieving
surround sound using regular headphones.
Previously, when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside
the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long
periods of time. Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a
room and places the sound at the front or the sides, outside the head,
to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters.
This technology is mainly for multichannel audio/video equipment with
Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and
works with a high performance digital signal processing (DSP) chip.
Dolby Headphone is effective not only for multichannel sources but
also for stereo programs.
On the AVP-A1HDCI, it is possible to output signals encoded in the
Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record
them on a separate recorder.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Remote Control
Dolby Headphone
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up
to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Playback
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro
Logic g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural
sound with up to 7.1-channels.
There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema”
suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing
games.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality
playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24
bit quantization on DVD-Video.
Setup
Dolby Pro Logic gx
DTS Surround
DTS 96/24
Connections
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to
achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band
signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to
create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of
presence for all stereo sources.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Getting Started
Dolby Pro Logic g
Getting Started
Connections
Setup
Playback
Timbre Matching™
THX Ultra2 Cinema
Boundary Gain Compensation
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theater, there
is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is
all around you. In a home theater, only two speakers located to the
side of your head are used. The Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving
you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, new
THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround
speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround
sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema
mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema
mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay.
If your chosen listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic reasons)
results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall, the
resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that
the overall sound quality becomes “boomy”. THX Ultra2 receivers
and controllers contain the BGC (Boundary Gain Compensation)
feature to provide an improved bass balance. BGC can be selected
by choosing “THX Ultra2 Subwoofer–Yes” from the “Boundary Gain
Compensation” section of the THX Audio setup menu.
Adaptive Decorrelation™
Remote Control
In a movie theater, a large number of surround speakers help create an
enveloping surround sound experience, while in a home theater there
are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers
sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The
surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
slightly changes one surround channel’s time and phase relationship
with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening
position and creates—with only two speakers—the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theater.
Multi-Zone
THX Ultra2™
Information
Troubleshooting
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified,
it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home
Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for
many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect
of the product including power amplifier performance, pre-amplifier
performance and operation, as well as hundreds of other parameters
in both the digital and analog domain.
In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect
to previous THX Ultra standards, three surround modes have been
added: the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode, THX Music Mode and THX
Games Mode.
Specifications
91
THX Music Mode
For the replay of 5.1 multi-channel music the THX Music Mode should
be selected. In this mode new THX processing is applied to the
surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS and
Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games
Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied
to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources
such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all
game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback
environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth
transition of audio in all points of the surround field.
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to
2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround
sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using
all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround
Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing
the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the
room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot. If
for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers
apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the
setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which
will re-optimize the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Ultra2 Cinema, THX Music
Mode and THX Games Mode.
THX and Re-EQ, THX Timbre Matching, THX Adaptive Decorrelation,
and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX™ Surround EX™
In 1999, a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the
release of the movie “Star Wars Episode I”. “Dolby Digital Surround
EX” is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense
of spatial expression and the positioning of the surround channel
sound. The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving sound
effects that seem to pass right over the listener’s head. This system
was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Laboratories, fusing THX’s
idea of improving spatial expression and achieving a uniform 360
degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories’ matrix encoding
technology. Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the existing
system Dolby Digital 5.1 channel, and the new “surround back (SB)
channel” was added to achieve improvements over the conventional
5.1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the
rear, the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the
back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with
the multi surround speaker systems used in movie theaters, thereby
enabling various types of surround sound. The surround back channel
signal is a matrix-encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital
SL (surround left) and SR (surround right) channels. Upon playback, the
signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder within
the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL, SR and SB channels and output
as 6.1 channels of signals. With the AVP-A1HDCI, the signals further
undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround
EX system. Even without the proper environment for playing the SB
channel, Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 100% compatible with
existing 5.1 channel playback systems, so they can be played as such.
In this case, the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal
from both the SL and SR channels, so none of the signal components
are missing. The effects specific to THX Surround EX (the sense of
spatial expression and the positioning of the sound), however, are the
same as with conventional 5.1 channel surround systems.
Troubleshooting
Specifications
®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and
Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more
of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161,
5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in
Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.
Information
Audyssey MultEQ® XT is the first technology to properly measure
sound information throughout a listening area, then combine this
information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in
the room. Based on these measurements, MultEQ XT calculates
an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency
response problems in every seat. Audyssey MultEQ XT not only
corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area but also
performs a fully automated surround system setup.
For a detailed description, see page 26.
HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces
the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining
compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the
dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.
Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified
automatically to select the optimum digital processing.
Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” time axis region
information volume expansion
In addition to the existing “AL24 Processing Plus” bit expansion
technology, DENON has also developed “Advanced AL24 Processing”
that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region
using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In
addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, “Advanced
AL24 Processing” uses data interpolation along the time axis or upconverted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the
original data. A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and
perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing-free pulse response,
pulsive music data and attack sounds.
This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the
delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and
the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. “Advanced AL24
Processing” is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD
DIRECT.
Multi-Zone
Audyssey MultEQ® XT
HDCD®
(High Definition Compatible Digital®)
Advanced AL24 Processing Multi
channel
Remote Control
Audyssey
For more information, visit www.audyssey.com.
DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface
developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of
digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with
DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector
using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality.
It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals
of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital
transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by
connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.
Playback
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation.
D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive,
nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA
SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents
Pending technology.
“Neural” and “Neural Audio” and “Neural Surround” are
trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories.
U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a
registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Dynamic EQ™ is
a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.
DENON LINK
Setup
Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the
excitement of surround music to more of America’s listening audience.
It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround
sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior
spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws
the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals,
and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems.
This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties
in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM
Satellite Radio’s new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround
will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other
broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to
broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer
three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone
will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music
each year.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound
quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception
and room acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the best possible frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment as volume is
changed. The result is bass response, tonal balance and surround
impression that remain constant despite changes in volume. This
is the first technology to combine information from incoming source
levels with actual output sound levels in the room, a pre-requisite
for delivering a loudness correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ
works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
Connections
Neural Surround
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™
Getting Started
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be registered
in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX is a
trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
92
Getting Started
HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Connections
Setup
HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based
on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in
consumer equipment.
Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are
transmitted with a single connection.
HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents
Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital
video signals in the same was as with DVI.
Surround Modes and Parameters
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Channel output
Surround Mode
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Playback
Remote Control
Front L/R
Center
Surround
L/R
Surround
Back L/R
Su­b­­­­woofer
D. COMP
z1
DRC
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
S
A
A
A
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
DSD DIRECT
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DSD MULTI DIRECT
S
D
D
D
D
A
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
S
D
D
D
D
A
STEREO
S
A
A
A
D
Deep Color
EXT. IN
S
D
D
D
MULTI CH IN
S
D
D
Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and
subtle gradations between colors.
Enables increased contrast ratio.
Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white.
At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum,
and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.
WIDE SCREEN
S
D
HOME THX CINEMA
(2ch)
S
HOME THX CINEMA
(5.1ch)
xvYCC
Multi-Zone
Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many
colors as existing HDTV signals.
Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately.
Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.
Information
Lip Sync
Troubleshooting
Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly
complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of
the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has
become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex enduser adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio
synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically with total accuracy.
Specifications
“HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
93
LFE
SB CH Out
Cinema
EQ.
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
A
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
A
A
D
A
A
A
A
S (NOTE6)
A
D
D
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
A
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
S (OFF)
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
D
D
D
D
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
A
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
A
A
S
S (NOTE1)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
S
D
D
A
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
A
A
S
S (NOTE2)
DTS NEO:6
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
A
A
S
S (NOTE1)
DOLBY DIGITAL
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DOLBY TrueHD
S
D
D
D
D
A
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DTS SURROUND
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DTS 96/24
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DTS-HD
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
S (0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
neural
S
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
S
A
7CH STEREO
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
SUPER STADIUM
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
ROCK ARENA
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
JAZZ CLUB
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
CLASSIC CONCERT
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
MONO
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
VIDEO GAME
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
MATRIX
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S (Auto)
S (0 dB)
A
S
A
DOLBY HEADPHONE
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
z2
AFDM
z3
z1
S: Signal / Adjustable
A : No signal / Not adjustable
D: Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
NOTE1 :This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”
(vpage 52).
NOTE2 :This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema”
or “Pro Logic” (vpage 52).
NOTE6 :This parameter can be used when GUI menu “Manual Setup”– “Audio Setup”– “ EXT. IN Setup”– “Mode” is set to “DSP”
(vpage 33)
NOTE:
z1 :
When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
z2 :
When playing Dolby True HD signal.
z3 :
When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.
PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode
only
Surround Mode
Mode
Decoder
Room Size
Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer
EXT. IN only
Center
Width
Center
Image
Subwoofer
Att.
Input
Channel
(NOTE6)
Tone z1
Night Mode
Room EQ
Dynamic
EQ z2
RESTORER
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
S (OFF)
DSD DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DSD MULTI DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
S (OFF)
STEREO
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
EXT. IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
A
MULTI CH IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
WIDE SCREEN
A
A
A
S (ON, 10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
HOME THX CINEMA
(2ch)
S (PLIIx C)
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
HOME THX CINEMA
(5.1ch)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (3)
S (3)
A
A
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (3)
S (3)
A
A
DTS NEO:6
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0.3)
DOLBY DIGITAL
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY DIGITAL Plus
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY TrueHD
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS SURROUND
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS 96/24
A
A
A
A
A
DTS-HD
A
A
A
A
neural
A
A
A
7CH STEREO
A
A
SUPER STADIUM
A
A
ROCK ARENA
A
A
JAZZ CLUB
A
CLASSIC CONCERT
S (NOTE5) S (NOTE5)
S (OFF)
S
Setup
S (NOTE5) S (NOTE5)
Connections
Panorama Dimension
NEO:6
MUSIC
mode only
A
S (OFF)
S
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
A
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
A
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
A
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (NOTE3)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (NOTE4)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
A
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
MONO
A
A
S (Medium)
S (0)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
VIDEO GAME
A
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
MATRIX
A
A
A
A
S (30 ms)
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
DOLBY HEADPHONE
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S
Specifications
A
S (OFF)
Troubleshooting
A
Information
A
S (OFF)
Multi-Zone
A
S (OFF)
Remote Control
S
Playback
S (OFF)
Getting Started
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
S: Signal / Adjustable
A : No signal / Not adjustable
NOTE3 :BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB
NOTE4 :BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB
NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting.
NOTE6 : “DSP” mode only
z1 :When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “ON”, you cannot use the “Tone” setting.
z2 :Can be set when GUI menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Room EQ” is set to “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Flat”, “Audyssey Byp.L/R”.
94
Getting Started
Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals
Input signals
Button
Surround mode
Note
ANALOG
Connections
DTS-HD
WMA
(Windows
LINEAR
Media Audio) DTS-HD DTS-HD
PCM /
High
/ MP3 /
Master
WAV
Resolution
MPEG-4
Audio
Audio
AAC / FLAC
DTS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With
Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With
Flag)
DOLBY
DTS
(5.1ch)
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DVD-AUDIO
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY
DIGITAL DIGITAL
DIGITAL DIGITAL
EX (With EX (With
(5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch)
Flag)
no Flag)
DOLBY
DVDDIGITAL
Audio
(2ch)
(multi ch)
Super Audio CD
DVDAudio
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
HOME THX CINEMA
z1
A
A
A
S
S
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ES MTRX6.1 + THX
z1
A
A
A
S
S
A
D
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
THX SURROUND EX
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
D
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
THX Ultra2 Cinema
z2
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
THX Music Mode
z2
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
THX Games Mode
z2
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
Remote Control
PLgx C + THX
z3
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
PLg C + THX
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PL + THX
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
NEO:6 + THX
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
MULTI CH 7.1 + THX
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (7.1)
A
A
A
Multi-Zone
MULTI CH 5.1 + THX
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
DTS-HD MSTR
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Setup
ES DSCRT6.1 + THX
Playback
THX Cinema
STANDARD
DTS SURROUND
Information
DTS-HD HI RES
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z1
A
A
A
A
A
F D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
F D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS SURROUND
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Troubleshooting
DTS 96/24
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS (–HD) + NEO:6
z1
A
A
A
S
S
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
Specifications
NOTE:
z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).
z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).
z3: For input signals other than 2 channel signals, this mode cannot be selected when surround back speaker is set
to “1spkr” or “None”.
95
F : Mode selectable in initial status
D : Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON”
S : Selectable mode
A : Non-selectable mode
Surround mode
Note
ANALOG
DTS
DOLBY
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With
Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With
Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DVD-AUDIO
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY
DIGITAL DIGITAL
DIGITAL DIGITAL
EX (With EX (With
(5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch)
Flag)
no Flag)
Super Audio CD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
(2ch)
DVD-Audio
(multi ch)
DVDAudio
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
STANDARD
DOLBY SURROUND
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY DIGITAL+
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
F
F
F
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY DIGITAL
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
F D
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx
MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA
z1
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC
z1
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME
z1
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
DOLBY HEADPHONE
z4
neural
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
MULTI IN + Dolby EX
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
MULTI CH IN 7.1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F D (7.1)
A
A
A
DIRECT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
DSD DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
DSD MULTI DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
DIRECT
M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M DIRECT + Dolby EX
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (7.1)
A
A
A
M DIRECT 7.1
NOTE:
z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).
z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).
z4: You can select this when the headphone plug is inserted into the headphone jack.
F : Mode selectable in initial status
D : Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON”
S : Selectable mode
A : Non-selectable mode
96
Specifications
A
z2
Troubleshooting
A
MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA
Information
S
S
Multi-Zone
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME
Remote Control
DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx
CINEMA
Playback
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
Setup
DOLBY TrueHD
Connections
DTS-HD
WMA
(Windows
LINEAR
DTS-HD
Media
DTS-HD
PCM /
High
Audio) / MP3 Master
WAV
Resolution
/ MPEG-4
Audio
Audio
AAC / FLAC
Getting Started
Input signals
Button
Input signals
Getting Started
Button
Surround mode
Note
ANALOG
Connections
WMA
(Windows
LINEAR
Media Audio)
PCM /
/ MP3 /
WAV
MPEG-4
AAC / FLAC
DTS-HD
DTS
DOLBY
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
DTS-HD
High
Resolution
Audio
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With
Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With
Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
TrueHD
DOLBY
DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY
DIGITAL
EX (With
Flag)
DVD-AUDIO
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DIGITAL DIGITAL
EX (With
(5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch)
no Flag)
DOLBY
DVDDIGITAL
Audio
(2ch)
(multi ch)
DVDAudio
(2ch)
Super Audio CD
DSD
DSD (2ch)
(multi ch)
PURE DIRECT
Setup
PURE DIRECT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
DSD PURE DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
DSD MULTI PURE
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
MULTI CH PURE DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
Playback
M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M PURE D + Dolby EX
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (7.1)
A
A
A
M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1
Remote Control
DSP SIMULATION
7CH STEREO
z5
Multi-Zone
Information
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
WIDE SCREEN
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SUPER STADIUM
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
ROCK ARENA
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
JAZZ CLUB
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
CLASSIC CONCERT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MONO
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
VIDEO GAME
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MATRIX
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
F
F
F
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
F
S
F
S
F
STEREO
STEREO
Troubleshooting
NOTE :
z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” (vpage 29).
z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None” (vpage 29).
z5: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None” and when using headphones, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.
“9CH STEREO” is displayed when surround (A+B) and the surround back speaker are used.
Specifications
97
F : Mode selectable in initial status
S : Selectable mode
A : Non-selectable mode
Windows Media Player ver.11
Wi-Fi®
IEEE 802.11b
Ad-hoc Communications
Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred
to as “ad hoc communications”. With such ad hoc communications
there is no connection to the Internet. Ad hoc communications are
suited for establishing simple temporary networks.
Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by “SSID” or
“Security Set Identifiers”. For further security, a WEP key is set and
signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match.
WEP Key (Network Key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting
data transfer. On the AVP-A1HDCI, the same WEP key is used for
data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on
both devices in order for communications to be established between
them.
The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the
wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer
rate.
98
Specifications
This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group
that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the
2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM
band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.
“Infrastructure Communications” refers to networks using wireless
LAN access points.
This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN
via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include
wireless broadband routers.
Troubleshooting
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the
Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN
devices.
Infrastructure Communications
Information
•DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
•Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™
products.
About Wireless LAN
The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the
wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer
rate.
Multi-Zone
DLNA
•Content providers are using the digital rights management technology
for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual
property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WMDRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this
device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM
Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play
Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s
ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM
Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license
for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may,
in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto
your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
Remote Control
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license
from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.
•The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Playback
This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage
fees are included in upgrade costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
•Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
Microsoft group of companies.
This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group
that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is
compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but
enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.
Setup
vTuner
A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.
IEEE 802.11g
Connections
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft
Corporation.
It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player
ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3
and WAV.
Windows Media DRM
Getting Started
About Networks
Getting Started
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition
to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key),
it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for
stronger security.
Connections
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
Setup
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
Playback
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when
a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point
and client.
Remote Control
Passphrase
This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication,
a WPA authentication method.
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
Multi-Zone
This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4,
the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing
the network key used for encryption for each packet.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
Information
Troubleshooting
This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the
current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected
to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the
“Rijndael” algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to
divide the data into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It
supports data lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128,
192 and 256 bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security.
Specifications
99
nMAIN ZONE
Video Convert
Monitor output
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “A to H” is
set) (vpage 46).
: Wallpaper or set background color displayed
: Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “H to H”
is set) (vpage 46).
: GUI menu not displayed
•The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60.
•When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
•If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.
•The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
100
Specifications
A : No output
z1: The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made (“Contrast”, “Brightness”,
“Chroma Level”, “Hue”).
z2: The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made (“DNR”, “Enhancer”,
“Sharpness”).
z3: Superimposed over video signal
z4: Only displayed when the MENU button is pressed
z5: If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is converted to PAL for output
Troubleshooting
VIDEOz1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z1 z5
VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEO z1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z1 z5
VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEOz1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z1 z5
VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
Information
VIDEOz1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z1 z5
A
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEO z1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z1 z5
A
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEOz1 z5
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEOz1 z5
A
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
z4
z4
z4
b z4
z
z
z
b VIDEO 3
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 3
VIDEOz3
z
z
z
b S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEOz3
b S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
z4
z4
z4
b z4
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
A
A
z
z
z
b COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENTz3
z
z
b VIDEOz3
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 3
VIDEOz3
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
VIDEO
A
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
z
z
z
b S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEOz3
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
b S-VIDEO*3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
z
HDMI 3
A
A
A
HDMIz3
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMIz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
A
A
z
HDMI 3
COMPONENT
A
A
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
VIDEO
A
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
z
HDMI 3
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
z
HDMI 3
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz3
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
z4
z4
z4
A
VIDEOz3
VIDEOz3
VIDEOz3
A
z
z
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEOz3
A
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
A
z4
z4
z4
A
COMPONENTz3
A
A
A
z
z
COMPONENT 3 COMPONENT 3 COMPONENTz3
A
z
z
VIDEO 3
VIDEO 3
VIDEOz3
A
COMPONENTz3
VIDEO
A
A
COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
A
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
A
COMPONENTz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
A
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
S-VIDEOz3
A
COMPONENTz3
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3 COMPONENTz3
A
Multi-Zone
VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO
Remote Control
S: Signal present
A : No signal
480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p
HDMI
b
b VIDEOz1
b S-VIDEOz1
b S-VIDEOz1
A
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b VIDEOz1
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b S-VIDEOz1
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b S-VIDEOz1
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
HDMIz2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Playback
Without HDMI
monitor
or
with HDMI
monitor off
VIDEO
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
Setup
With HDMI
monitor
Input signal
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
Connections
ON
HDMI
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Getting Started
Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output
Getting Started
Video Convert
Connections
Setup
OFF
Input signal
Monitor output (Normally)
Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)
Playback
Remote Control
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
A
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
S
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
S (COMPONENT)
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
S
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S (HDMI)
A
A
A
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
A
A
S
S (HDMI)
A
A
S (VIDEO)
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S (HDMI)
A
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
A
S
S
S (HDMI)
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
S
A
A
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
A
A
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
S
A
S
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
A
S (VIDEO)
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S (HDMI)z
A
A
A
S: Signal present
A : No signal
S: Output present
A : No output
z: Superimposed over video signal
Multi-Zone
To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.
nZONE2
Information
Video Convert
Troubleshooting
ON
Input signal
Monitor output
Specifications
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
A
A
A
A
S (1080p)
S (480p ~ 720p)
S (480i / 576i)
S (1080p)
S (480p ~ 720p)
S (480i / 576i)
S (1080p)
S (480p ~ 720p)
S (480i / 576i)
S (1080p)
S (480p ~ 720p)
S (480i / 576i)
A
A
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S (VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)z1
S (COMPONENT)z1
S (COMPONENT)z1
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
A
S (VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S (VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S : Output present
A : No output
z1: With On-screen display, the VIDEO signal is superimposed output.
z2: With On-screen display, the S-VIDEO signal is superimposed output.
COMPONENT :
When you operate the MENU button, on-screen display is displayed.
101
Monitor output
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
OFF
–
–
–
Used
Not used
–
–
–
Used
Not used
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
S
A
S
A
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (COMPONENT)z1
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z2
S (COMPONENT)z1
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
–
A
S (VIDEO)
A
S (VIDEO)*2
S (VIDEO)
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
–
A
S (VIDEO)
A
S (VIDEO)*2
S (VIDEO)
Setup
COMPONENT
Connections
S-VIDEO
Monitor Out
Getting Started
Input signal
Video Convert
Playback
S : Output present
A : No output
z1: With On-screen display, the VIDEO signal is superimposed output.
z2: With On-screen display, the S-VIDEO signal is superimposed output.
Input signal
S: Signal present
A : No signal
Monitor output
VIDEO
A
S
A
S
VIDEO
A
S (VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (S-VIDEO)
Multi-Zone
S-VIDEO
A
A
S
S
Remote Control
nZONE3
S: Output present
A : No output
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
102
Getting Started
Symptom
Power turns off
suddenly and
power indicator
flashes red.
Troubleshooting
Connections
Setup
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
Playback
GGeneralH
Remote Control
Symptom
Power does not
turn on, or turns
off directly after it
was turned on.
No sound is
produced from
speakers.
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Cause
Countermeasure
•Connection of the power cord is •Check that the power plug is
faulty.
securely inserted into the AVPA1HDCI’s AC inlet and the wall
power outlet.
•The connection with the input •Check the connections.
devices or power amp is faulty.
•Device you want to play and set •Select an appropriate input
input source do not match.
source.
•Master volume is turned too •Adjust the master volume to an
low.
appropriate level.
•Mute mode is set.
•Cancel the mute mode.
•Headphones are connected.
•Disconnect the headphones.
•No digital signals are being •Select an input source for which
input.
the digital input setting has been
made.
•The connectors to which the •Set the input mode.
digital inputs are assigned and
the settable input modes do not
match.
Display is off.
•The “Dimmer” setting is set to •Set to something other than
“OFF”.
“OFF”.
•The PURE DIRECT mode is set. •Set a surround mode other than
the PURE DIRECT mode.
“DOLBY DIGITAL” •DVD player’s digital audio output •Check the DVD player’s audio
indicator does not
setting is not proper.
output setting. For details, read
appear on display.
the DVD player’s operating
instructions.
103
Page
23
11
45
58
58
58
45, 48
47
43
52
–
Cause
•Set is damaged.
Countermeasure
•Turn off the power and contact a
DENON service center.
Page
–
Countermeasure
•Replace with new batteries.
•Operate within the specified
range.
•Remove the obstacle.
Page
3, 4
4
•Insert the batteries in the
proper direction, following the
polarity marks in the battery
compartment.
•Move the set to a place in which
the remote control sensor will
not be exposed to strong light.
3, 4
•Set the same remote IDs for the
main unit and remote control
unit.
43, 80, 85
GRemote Control UnitH
Symptom
Cause
Set does not work •Batteries are worn.
properly when
•You are operating outside of the
remote control
specified range.
unit operated.
•Obstacle between main unit and
remote control unit.
•The batteries are not inserted in
the proper direction, as indicated
by the polarity marks in the
battery compartment.
•The set’s remote control sensor
is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent
bulb light, etc.).
•The remote ID of the main unit
and remote control unit do not
match.
–
4
11
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume
to an appropriate level.
•Set to the “STANDARD” (Dolby/
DTS Surround) or “HOME THX
CINEMA” mode.
–
Symptom
The on-screen
display does not
appear.
No picture
appears.
No picture
appears
with HDMI
connections.
–
–
47
32
•Check the connections.
12, 13
•Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.
•High definition (1080i/720p) and
progressive (480p/576p) video
signals are not down-converted.
Set the player to interlace
(480i/576i) signals.
52
–
•The connections to the HDMI
connectors are faulty.
•HDMI input setting is improper.
•The monitor is not compatible
with
copyright
protection
(HDCP).
•The HDMI format of the player
and monitor do not match.
•Depending on the monitor you
have connected, the display may
not be correct when you set to
“Auto (Dual)”.
•Input source does not match
recorder’s video connection
connector (video or S-Video).
•Check the connections.
12
•Check the HDMI input setting.
•Connect a monitor that is
compatible
with
copyright
protection (HDCP).
•Match the HDMI format of the
player and monitor.
•Set to either “Monitor 1” or
“Monitor 2”.
48
12
Picture cannot be
recorded.
•The video conversion function
does not work for the REC
OUT connectors. Match the
input source and recorder
connections.
•This is not a malfunction. Most
movie software includes copy
prevention signals and cannot be
copied.
16, 17
DVDs cannot be
copied on a VCR.
–
–
•Set properly.
–
12
32
104
Information
•Set the DVD player. For details,
refer to the DVD player’s
operating instructions.
•DVD player is not compatible •Use a DTS-compatible player.
with DTS sound playback.
•The AVP-A1HDCI’s “Decode •Set to the “Auto” or “DTS”
Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.
mode.
•The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI •Set to “Amp”.
Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to
“TV”.
50
•The connections between the
AVP-A1HDCI and monitor are
faulty.
•The monitor’s input setting is
wrong.
•PURE DIRECT mode is set.
•The player is connected using the
component input connectors, the
monitor is connected using the
video (yellow) or S-Video output
connectors.
GVideoH
29
•Check the connections.
Page
41
Specifications
–
Cause
Countermeasure
•The format of the GUI and TV •Match the format of the GUI and
(NTSC or PAL) do not match.
TV.
Troubleshooting
50 ~ 52
Page
32
Multi-Zone
•Set to “Yes”.
29
Cause
Countermeasure
•The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI • Set to “TV”.
Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to
“Amp”.
Playback
HDMI audio
signals are not
output from
speakers.
•Set to something other than
“None”.
•Select a surround playback
mode.
•Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
50 ~ 52
Symptom
No sound is
output from
the monitor
connected
with HDMI
connections.
Setup
•Surround back speaker setting is
set to “None”.
•Surround mode not set to a mode
for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.
•Subwoofer’s power not turned
on.
•The “Subwoofer” setting at
“Speaker configuration” is set to
“No”.
•The subwoofer is not properly
connected.
•The subwoofer’s volume is
turned off.
No test tones are •Surround
mode
not
set
produced when
to “STANDARD” (Dolby/DTS
main remote
Surround) or “HOME THX
control unit’s TEST
CINEMA” mode.
button is pressed.
DTS sound is not •DVD player’s audio output setting
output.
is not set to bitstream.
Page
50
Connections
No sound
is produced
from surround
speakers.
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
Cause
Countermeasure
•You are playing a monaural •The mode is set to something
source (TV, AM radio broadcast, other than “STANDARD” (Dolby/
etc.) in the “STANDARD” (Dolby/ DTS Surround) or “HOME THX
DTS Surround) or “HOME THX CINEMA” .
CINEMA” mode.
•The surround mode is set to •Set to a surround playback
“STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE mode.
DIRECT”.
Remote Control
Symptom
No sound is
produced from
center speaker.
Getting Started
GAudioH
Getting Started
GiPodH
Symptom
iPod cannot be
played.
Cause
Countermeasure
Connections
•The input source assigned to •Switch to the input source
“iPod dock” is not selected.
assigned at “iPod dock”.
•Cable is not properly connected. •Reconnect.
•Control Dock for iPod’s AC •Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s
adapter is not connected to AC adapter into a power outlet.
power outlet.
Page
49
14
–
GNET/USB / RhapsodyH
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Symptom
When a USB
memory device
is connected,
“USB” is not
displayed on the
GUI menu.
Multi-Zone
Information
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
Cause
•The set cannot recognize a USB
memory device.
•A USB memory device not
conforming to mass storage class
or MTP standards is connected.
•The set port and the connected
port do not match.
•A USB memory device that
the set cannot recognize is
connected.
•USB memory device is connected
via USB hub.
•USB memory device is in format
other than FAT16 or FAT32.
•USB memory device is divided
into multiple partitions.
Troubleshooting
Specifications
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
105
•Files are stored in a noncompatible format.
•You are attempting to play a file
that is copyright protected.
•Characters that cannot be
displayed are used.
Countermeasure
•Check the connection.
•Connect a USB memory device
conforming to mass storage
class or MTP standards.
•Connect to the port set at “USB
Select”.
•This is not a malfunction. DENON
does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or
receive power.
•Connect the USB memory device
directly to the USB port.
•Set the format to FAT16 or
FAT32. For details, refer to the
USB memory device’s operating
instructions.
•When divided into multiple
partitions, only files stored in the
top partition can be played.
•Record the files in a compatible
format.
•Files that are copyright protected
cannot be played on this set.
•This is not a malfunction. On
this set, characters that cannot
be displayed are replaced with a
“ . (period)”.
Page
19
–
49
–
–
–
–
66
66
–
Symptom
Internet radio
cannot be played.
Cause
Countermeasure
•Ethernet cable is not properly •Check the connection status.
connected
or
network
is
disconnected.
•Program is being broadcast in •Only Internet radio programs in
non-compatible format.
MP3 and WMA can be played on
this set.
•The computer’s or router’s •Check the computer’s or router’s
firewall is activated.
firewall settings.
•Radio station is not currently •Choose a radio station that is
broadcasting.
currently broadcasting.
•IP address is wrong.
•Check the set’s IP address.
Files stored on a
•Files are stored in a non- •Record in a compatible format.
computer cannot
compatible format.
be played.
•You are attempting to play a file •Files that are copyright protected
that is copyright protected.
cannot be played on this set.
•Set and computer are connected •The set’s USB port cannot
by USB cable.
be used for connection to a
computer.
Server is not
•The computer’s or router’s •Check the computer’s or router’s
found, or it is
firewall is activated.
firewall settings.
not possible to
•Computer’s power is not turned •Turn on the power.
connect to the
on.
server.
•Server is not running.
•Launch the server.
•Set’s IP address is wrong.
•Check the set’s IP address.
Cannot connect to •Radio station is not currently •Wait a while before trying again.
preset or favorite
broadcasting.
radio stations.
•Radio station is not currently in •It is not possible to connect to
service.
radio stations that are no longer
in service.
For some
•Station is congested or not •Wait a while before trying again.
radio stations,
currently broadcasting.
“Server Full”
or “Connection
Down” is
displayed and
station cannot be
connected to.
Sound is broken
•Network’s signal transfer speed •This is not a malfunction. When
during playback.
is slow or communications lines playing broadcast data with a
or radio station is congested.
high bit rate, the sound may
be broken, depending on the
communications conditions.
Sound quality is
•File being played has a low bit •This is not a malfunction.
poor or played
rate.
sound is noisy.
Page
21
66
–
68
38
66
66
–
–
–
–
38
–
–
–
–
–
Stops in the
middle of playing.
•Cannot be
A1HDCI.
•Get a full account.
66, 70
bNeed full account.
with AVP- •Delete from “PC Application”.
–
Played sound is
interrupted or
sound cannot be
played.
Page
35 ~ 38
–
–
–
–
GXM Satellite RadioH
done
with AVP- •Delete from “PC Application”.
–
Symptom
“CHECK XM
TUNER” is
displayed.
bNeed full account.
Page
19
19
Troubleshooting
”CHECK
ANTENNA” is
displayed.
Cause
Countermeasure
•The XM Mini-Tuner is not •Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is
installed or not fully seated in the fully seated in the dock and check
XM Mini-Tuner Dock or the XM the XM Mini-Tuner dock cable is
Mini-Tuner dock is not connected connected to the AVP-A1HDCI.
to the AVP-A1HDCI.
•AVP-A1HDCI’s XM connector and •Check that the connections are
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home correct.
Dock is not properly connected.
Information
•Cannot be
A1HDCI.
done
66, 70
Cause
Countermeasure
•The settings of the SSID •Match the network settings with
and network key (WEP) are the AVP-A1HDCI’s settings.
incorrect.
•The reception is poor and the •Shorten the distance from the
signals cannot be received.
wireless LAN’s access point,
remove any obstacles and
otherwise improve visibility, then
try reconnecting. Also install
away from microwave ovens
and the access points of other
networks.
•There are multiple networks and •Set the access point’s channel
the usable channels overlap.
settings away from the channels
used for other networks.
Alternatively, connect using a
network cable.
•There are multiple networks and •Set the access point’s channel
the usable channels overlap.
settings away from the channels
used for other networks.
Alternatively, connect using a
network cable.
Multi-Zone
Cannot delete
Rhapsody
Channel
registered in “My
Channels”.
Cannot delete
Tracks, Playlists,
Channels
registered in “My
Library”.
66, 70
•Get a full account.
www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup
•When the playlist is compiled in
“PC Application”, it is registered
to “My Library”. In this way, the
playlist can be played in AVPA1HDCI.
Symptom
Cannot connect
to network.
Remote Control
Cannot compile
Playlist.
38
GWireless LANH
Playback
•When the trial period has finished,
there is a limit to the playing time
and number of tracks that can be
played.
•When the trial period has finished,
there is a limit to the playing time
and number of tracks that can be
played.
•The AVP-A1HDCI does not
respond to playlist compilation.
Page
38
Setup
Cannnot play.
•Trial period has expired.
Countermeasure
•Check if the Username for
Rhapsody has been properly
entered.
•Re-enter the Password. (Password
is not displayed.)
•Get a full account.
www.rhapsody.com/denon/signup
Connections
Cause
•Login information is incorrect.
Getting Started
Symptom
Cannot login
to Rhapsody.
(“Username
or Password
is incorrect” is
displayed)
Specifications
106
Getting Started
GXM Satellite RadioH
Connections
Setup
Cause
•The signal cannot be received.
”OFF AIR” is
displayed.
Receiving only
XM channels 0
and 1.
“XM - - - ” is
displayed.
•The selected channel is not •Select another channel.
currently broadcasting.
•The XM Mini-Tuner is not •Contact XM Radio.
activated.
–
•You selected an XM channel that •Consult the latest channel
is blocked or cannot be receive guide at www.xmradio.com or
with your XM subscription www.xmaradio.ca for the current
package.
list of channels. For cases of
a new radio or a radio that has
not received XM’s signal for an
extended period, allow the radio
to receive the XM satellite signal
for at least 5 minutes and then
try to select the channel again.
•The selected channel is not •Consult the latest channel
available. The channel may have guide at www.xmradio.com or
been reassigned to a different www.xmaradio.ca for the current
channel number. This message list of channels. For information
may occur initially with a new on receiving this channel,
radio or a radio that has not visit
www.xmradio.com
or
received XM’s signal for an www.xmaradio.ca contact XM
extended period.
Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346
or 1-877-438-9677.
–
Playback
Symptom
”NO SIGNAL” is
displayed.
Remote Control
“UPDATING” is
displayed.
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Specifications
107
Countermeasure
•Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner
and Home Dock antenna.
Page
–
–
–
Specifications
0.01 %
Network type (wireless LAN standards) :Conforming to IEEE 802.11b
Conforming to IEEE 802.11g
(Conforming to Wi-Fi®)z
Transfer rate:
DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching)
OFDM: 54 / 48 / 36 / 24 / 18 / 12 / 9 / 6 Mbps (Automatic switching)
SSID (Network name)
Security:
WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits)
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
2,412 MHz ~ 2,472 MHz
Used frequency range:
Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 11ch (DS-SS) (Of which 1 channel used)
No. of channels:
Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 11ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used)
Multi-Zone
nGeneral
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
[AM]
520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz
19 µV
nMain remote control unit (RC-1067)
Batteries:
Maximum external dimensions:
Weight:
LR6/AA Type (two batteries)
63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm
190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries)
nSub remote control unit (RC-1070)
Batteries:
Maximum external dimensions:
Weight:
R03/AAA Type (two batteries)
49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm
114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries)
z:Wi-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the “Wi-Fi Alliance”, a group certifying interoperability
among wireless LAN devices.
bFor purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
108
Specifications
[FM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)
87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz
1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)
MONO 77 dB
STEREO 72 dB
MONO 0.2 %
STEREO 0.3 %
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
2A
0.3 W (Standby)
434 (W) x 214 (H) x 488 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 8-27/64” x 19-7/32”)
27 kg (Approx 59 lbs 8 oz)
Troubleshooting
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Maximum external dimensions:
Weight:
Information
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
Remote Control
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
0.01 %
85 dB
Playback
nTuner section
HD
530 kHz ~ 1710 kHz
20 µV
nWireless LAN
nVideo section
• Standard video connectors
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• S-Video connectors
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• Color component video connector
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
[AM]
Setup
• Analog
Input sensitivity / Input impedance: RCA Pre output (unbalanced):200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms
XLR Pre output (balanced) :400 mV / 100 kΩ/kohms
10 Hz ~ 100 kHz +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
Frequency response:
102 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)
S/N:
0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Distortion:
Rated output:
RCA Pre output (unbalanced):1.2 V
XLR Pre output (balanced) :2.4 V
• Digital
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
D/A output:
Total harmonic distortion — 0.005 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
Dynamic range — 110 dB
Format — Digital audio interface
Digital input:
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
2.5 mV
Input sensitivity:
±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
RIAA deviation:
74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
S/N:
150 mV
Rated output:
0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Distortion factor:
[FM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)
87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz
1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)
MONO 77 dB
STEREO 72 dB
HD
85 dB
MONO 0.2 %
STEREO 0.3 %
Connections
nAudio section
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
Getting Started
nHD Radio section
List of preset codes
Denon Amp
D
Denon
81001, 82001, 83001, 84001
G
Denon Tuner
D
Denon (Analog)
Denon (XM Radio)
52863, 52795, 52800, 52805
52864, 52812, 52813, 52814
Denon Digital Tuner
D
Denon (NET)
Denon (HD Radio)
62865, 62837, 62838, 62839
62840, 62841, 62842, 62843
I
J
Denon iPod
D
Denon
72815, 72816, 72817, 72818
Cable
A
B
C
D
E
F
A-Mark
ABC
Accuphase
Acorn
Action
Active
ADB
Aichi Denshi
Americast
Amstrad
Archer
Auna
Austar
BCC
Bell South
Bestlink
Birmingham Cable
Communications
British Telecom
Cable & Wireless
Century
Coship
Daehan
Daeryung
Digeo
Director
DX Antenna
Emerson
Encon
Fosgate
Foxtel
France Telecom
H
00008, 00144
00237, 00003, 00008
00003
00237
00237
00237
01230
01512
00899
01222
00237
01230
00276
00276
00899
00303
00276
00003
01068
00008
01462
00778
01877, 00877, 00477, 00008
01187
00476
01500
00303
00008
00276
01222
00817
PRESET CODE
K
L
M
Freebox
Fujitsu
Galaxi
GE
Gehua
General Instrument
Gibralter
GNI
GoldStar
Hitachi
Hongtian Jiangsu
Hwalin
Insight
Jerrold
Jiuzhou
KNC
LG
Macab
Madritel
Maspro
Matav
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Motorola
N
O
P
MS
NEC
Noos
Nova Vision
Novaplex
NTL
Oak
Ono
Optus
Pace
Panasonic
Paragon
Penney
Philips
Pioneer
Q
R
S
Pulsar
PVP Stereo Visual
Matrix
Quasar
RadioShack
Regal
Runco
Sagem
Salora
Samsung
01482
01497
00008
00237, 00144
00476
00476, 00810, 00276, 00003
00003
01466
00144
00003, 00008
01462
00303
00476, 00810
00476, 00810, 00276, 00003
01445
00008
00144
00817
01230
01510
01082
00000
00003
01376, 00476, 00810, 00276,
01187
00303
01496
00817
00008
00008
00276, 00003, 01060, 01068
00303
01068
00276, 01060
01877, 00877, 00237, 00008,
01060, 01068, 01577
00000, 00008, 00144, 01488
00000, 00008, 00525
00000
01305, 00317, 00817
01877, 00877, 00144, 00533,
01500
00000
00003
00000
00303
00276
00000
00817
00000
00003, 00000, 00144, 00778,
00840, 01060, 01666
Scientific Atlanta
T
U
V
Z
Skyworth
Sony
Sprucer
Starcom
StarHub
Sumitomo
Supercable
Taihan
TCL
Telewest
Time Warner cable
TongKook
Torx
Toshiba
Trans PX
TS
United Cable
US Electronics
Videoway
Visiopass
Zenith
01877, 00877, 00477, 00237,
00003, 00000, 00008, 01510
01464
01006, 01460
00144
00003
00276
01500, 01504
00276
00778
01445
01068
01877
00840
00003
00000, 01509
00276, 00303
00003, 00303
00276, 00003
00276, 00003, 00008
00000
00817
00000, 00525, 00899
B
C
D
F
G
Cable/PVR Combination b1
A
D
F
G
J
M
P
S
T
Z
Americast
Digeo
Freebox
General Instrument
Jerrold
Motorola
Pace
Pioneer
Scientific Atlanta
Sony
Supercable
Time Warner cable
Zenith
00899
01187
01482
00810
00810
01376, 00810, 01187
01877, 00237
01877, 00877
01877, 00877
01006
00276
01877
00899
H
I
J
K
L
CD Player
A
Acoustic Research
Advantage
Aiwa
Arcam
Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Audioton
AVI
40420
40032
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
M
Balanced Audio
Technology
Burmester
Bush
Cairn
California Audio Labs
Cambridge
Cambridge Audio
Cambridge
Soundworks
Carver
CDC
CEC
Copland
Curtis Mathes
Cyrus
Denon
DKK
DMX Electronics
Dual
Dynaco
Dynamic Bass
Fisher
Garrard
Genexxa
Goldmund
Grundig
Hafler
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Inkel
Integra
Jerrold
JVC
Kenwood
KLH
Krell
Linn
Loewe
Luxman
LXI
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
MCS
Memorex
Meridian
Micromega
Miro
Mission
40157
Modulaire
40420
40388
40157
40029, 40303
40157
40157
MTC
Musical Fidelity
Myryad
NAD
Naim
NSM
Onkyo
40157
40157, 40179
40420
40420
40393
40032
40157
40873, 40003, 40766,
[42867]z, 42868
40000
40157
40003
40157
40179
40000, 40179
40393, 40420
40000, 40032, 40037, 40179
40157
40157
40173
40100, 40157, 40173
40032
40157
40101
40003
40032, 40072
40681, 40000, 40029, 40157,
40028, 40037, 40036, 40190
41318
40157
40157
40157
40393
40179
40157
40029, 40157
40157
40029
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,
40468
40157
40157
40000
40157
N
O
Optimus
P
Q
R
Orion
Panasonic
Parasound
Penney
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Proceed
Proton
QED
Quad
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
RCA
Realistic
S
Restek
Revox
Roksan
Rotel
Royal
SAE
Saisho
Sansui
Sanyo
SAST
Sears
Sharp
Siemens
Silsonic
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
T
Sugden
Sylvania
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Tascam
40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,
40420, 40468
40420
40393
40157
40000, 40721
40157
40157
40868, 40101
40000, 40032, 40037, 40087,
40179, 40393, 40420, 40468
40393
40029, 40303, 40388, 40752
40420
40029
40157
40032, 40101, 40468
40157
40420
40157
40157
40157
40029
40157
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,
40468
40032, 40053, 40179, 40420,
40468
40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,
40420, 40468
40157
40157
40420
40157, 40420
40420
40157
40000
40000, 40157
40000, 40087, 40179
40157
40179
40037
40157
40036
40157
40157
40490, 40000, 40100, 41364,
40185
40157
40157
40157
40032
40393, 40420
U
V
W
Teac
Technics
Techwood
Thomson
Thorens
Thule Audio
Tokai
Universum
Victor
Wadia
Wards
Y
Yamaha
Yorx
40490, 40393, 40420
40029, 40303
40303
40053
40157
40157
40420
40157, 40053
40072
40393
40000, 40032, 40157, 40053,
40087, 40179
40490, 40868, 40032, 40036
40000
CD Recorder
D
J
R
S
T
Denon
JVC
RCA
Sony
Teac
Thomson
C
D
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
O
Aiwa
Akai
Arcam
Audiolab
Carver
Denon
Fisher
Garrard
Genexxa
GoldStar
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Inkel
JVC
Kenwood
LG
Luxman
Magnavox
Marantz
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Myryad
Onkyo
Optimus
Orion
Palladium
Panasonic
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
R
S
Polk Audio
Radiola
RCA
Revox
Sansui
Sanyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Sonic
Sony
40766, 42868
40072
40053, 40420
40000, 40100, 41364
40420
40053
Tape Deck
A
P
20029, 20197, 20200, 21315
20283, 20439
20076
20029
20029
20076, 20371, 21311,
[22471]z
20074
20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
20439
20375
20029, 20375
20182, 20029, 21314
20070, 20071, 20337
20244, 20273, 20274, 20303,
20304, 20310, 21309
20070, 20071, 20092, 20233,
20234, 21364
20375
20308, 20309
20029
20029, 20009
20099
20283, 20439
20029
20135, 20136, 20282
20027, 20220, 20337, 20439
20308, 20309
T
TaeKwang
Tandberg
Teac
U
V
W
Y
Technics
Technovox
Thorens
Universum
Victor
Wards
Wharfedale
Yamaha
20375
20229
20029, 20229
20337
20027, 20220, 20099, 20109,
21306, 21312
20029
20029
20027, 20220
20029
20029, 20009
20074
20231, 20371
20337
20375
20243, 20170, 20291, 20234,
21313
20439
20109
20280, 20283, 20289, 20308,
20309
20229
20229
20029
20375, 20439
20244, 20273, 20274
20027, 20029
20439
20097, 20094
HDTV Tuner b1
A
C
D
E
G
H
I
L
M
N
ABS
Accurian
Alienware
CyberPower
D-Link
Dgtec
Epson
Gateway
Hewlett Packard
Howard Computers
HP
Hush
iBUYPOWER
LG
Linksys
Media Center PC
Microsoft
Mind
Motorola
Niveus Media
Northgate
01272
01653
01272
01272
01554
01363
01563
01272
01272, 01267
01272
01272, 01267
01272
01272
01415
01272, 01365
01272
01272, 01805
01272
01363
01272
01272
P
R
S
T
V
X
Z
Packard Bell
Panasonic
Pioneer
Ricavision
Samsung
Sensory Science
Sharp
SMC
Sony
Stack 9
Sylvania
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Toshiba
Touch
Viewsonic
Vizio
Voodoo
Xbox
ZT Group
01272
01120
01010
01272
01190, 01490
01126
01010
01456
01272, 01324, 01364
01272
01563
01272
01272
01272
01272
01272, 01329
01126
01272
01805
01272
Aston
Astra
Astratec
Astro
Atlantic Telephone
Atsat
AtSky
Audioline
Aurora
Austar
B
Satellite Receiver
A
@sat
@Sky
A-Mark
ABsat
ADB
AGS
Aiwa
Akai
Alba
Allsat
Alltech
Allvision
AlphaStar
Amitronica
Amstrad
Anglo
Ankaro
AntSat
Apollo
Arcon
Armstrong
Arnion
Asat
ASCI
ASLF
AssCom
Astacom
01300
01334
00345
00123, 00713
00642, 01259, 01367, 01418,
01473, 01491
00710
01514
00200
00455, 00713, 01284, 01659,
01811
00200, 01043
00713
01232, 01334, 01412
00772
00713
00345, 00713, 00795, 00847,
00863, 00882, 01113, 01175,
01693, 01801
00713
00713
01083
00455
01043, 01075
00200
01300
00200
01334
00713
00853
00710
Axiel
Axil
Axis
B@ytronic
Beko
Bell ExpressVu
Big Sat
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boca
Boston
Brainwave
British Sky
Broadcasting
Broco
BskyB
BT
Bubu Sat
Bush
C
Canal
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
Canal+
Centrex
CGV
Chaparral
Cherokee
Chess
Chili
CityCom
Classic
Clatronic
CNS
Comag
Condor
Conia
Contec
Continental Edison
Coship
00142
00713
01743
00173, 00658, 01099, 01100,
01113
01333
01300
01334
01672
00642, 00879, 01333, 01433
00497, 00642, 00863, 00879,
01176, 01259
00710
01457, 01659
01111
01412
00455
00775
01457
01284
00173
00713
00713, 01232, 01366
00710, 01251
00658, 01672
D
00847, 01175, 01662, 01847
00713
00847, 01175, 01662
00710, 01296
00713
01284, 01645, 01672, 01743,
01811
00853
00853, 01622
00853, 01339, 01853
00853
01457
01413, 01567
00216
00123, 00710
00713, 01085, 01334, 01626
01718
00299, 00394, 00818, 01075,
01176, 01232
01672
01413
01367
01232, 01366, 01412, 01413
01700
01695
00394
01695
01457
E
Crossdigital
Crown
Cryptovision
Cyfra+
Cyrus
D-box
Daewoo
Delfa
Deltasat
Dgtec
Digenius
Digiality
Digifusion
DigiLogic
DigiQuest
DigiSat
Digisky
DigitAll World
Digiturk
Digiwave
Dijam
DiPro
01109
01284
00455, 00795
01076
00200
00723, 00873, 01114
00713, 01111, 01296, 01743
00863
01075
01542, 01631, 01242
00299
01685
01645, 01743
01284
00863, 01300, 01457, 01473
01232
01457
01227
01076
01631
01296
01367, 01543
01377, 00392, 00566, 00639,
01639, 01142, 00247, 00749,
01749, 00724, 00819, 01856,
DirecTV
01076, 01108, 00099, 01109,
01414, 01442, 01609, 01392,
01640
Discovery
00710
Dish Network System 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Dishpro
01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Distratel
01283, 01704
DMT
01075
DNT
00200
Dream Multimedia 01237
DSE
01375
DSTV
00642, 00879, 01433
Durabrand
01284
DX Antenna
01530
01505, 01005, 00775, 00455,
00610, 00713, 00853, 00871,
Echostar
01086, 01200, 01323, 01409,
01418, 01473, 01775
Einhell
00713
Elap
00713, 01567
Elsat
00713
Elta
00200, 01659
Emme Esse
00871
Energy Sistem
01631
Engel
00713, 01251
EP Sat
00455
Esat
00879
Eurieult
00882
PRESET CODE
F
G
H
Eurocrypt
EuroLine
Europa
Europhon
Eurosky
Eurostar
Eutelsat
Expressvu
Fenner
Ferguson
Finlandia
Finlux
Flair Mate
FMD
Force
Fortec Star
00455
01251
00863
00299
00262, 00299
00818
00713
00775, 01775
00713
00455, 01291, 01743
00455
00455
00713
01251, 01413, 01457
01101
01083
00455, 00497, 00795, 00879,
Foxtel
01162, 01176, 01356
Fracapro Planet
00871
Fracarro
00125, 00871
France Telecom
00871
Freesat
00882
FTE
00863
FTEmaximal
00713, 00863
00173, 00262, 00299, 00394,
Fuba
01214, 01251, 01801
Fugionkyo
00125
Funai
01377
00853, 00863, 01101, 01111,
Galaxis
01557
Gardiner
00818
Garnet
01075
GbSAT
01214
GE
00392, 00566
Gecco
01412
General Instrument 00869
General Satellite
01176
GF Good Friends
01043
GF Star
01043
01251, 01334, 01412, 01429,
Globo
01626
GOD Digital
00200
GOI
00775, 01775
Gold Box
00853
Gold Vision
01631
Golden Interstar
01283
GoldStar
00394
Goodmans
00455, 01284, 01291
Gradiente
00887
Granada
00455
00173, 00345, 00847, 00853,
Grundig
00879, 01291
Handan
01622
Hanseatic
01099, 01100
PRESET CODE
Hauppauge
HB
HDT
Hills
Hirschmann
Hisense
Hitachi
Homecast
Hornet
Houston
HTS
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
I
J
K
Huth
Hyundai
iCan
ID Digital
ILLUSION sat
iLo
Imperial
Indovision
Ingelen
Innova
Interstar
InVideo
ISkyB
Italtel
ITT Nokia
Jadeworld
Jaeger
Jerrold
Jiuzhou
JOK
JVC
K-SAT
Kamm
Kaon
KaTelco
Kathrein
Kennex
Kenwood
Klap
Kocmoc TB
Koscom
Kosmos
Kreiling
01672
01214, 01801
01159
01232
00125, 00173, 00299, 00710,
00882, 01085, 01111, 01232,
01412
01535
00749, 00819, 00455, 01250,
01284, 01518, 01523, 01525
01214, 01680, 01700
01300
00775
00775, 01775
L
01142, 00749, 01749, 01442
00863, 01176, 01225, 01406,
01427, 01675, 01743, 01790,
01915
01075
01075, 01159
01367
01176
01557, 01631
01535
01334, 01429, 01672
00887
00882
00099
01214
00871
00887
00871
00455, 00723, 00873
00642
01334
00869
01450
00710
00775, 01507, 01531, 01775
00713
00713
01300
01111
00123, 00173, 00200, 00249,
00394, 00442, 00480, 00504,
00658, 00713, 00818, 01221,
01416, 01561, 01567
00125
00853
00710
01333
01043
00442, 01333
00249, 00658
M
Kreiselmeyer
Kross
L&S Electronic
Labgear
LaSAT
Lava
Legend
Legrand
Lemon
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Lifesat
Lodos
Logik
Logix
Lorenzen
Luxor
M Electronic
M vision
Magnavox
Manata
Manhattan
Marantz
Maspro
Master’s
Matsui
Maximum
McIntosh
MDS
Mediabox
Mediacom
MediaSa
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MiCO
Micro
Micro Elektronic
Micro Technology
Micromaxx
Microstar
Microtec
Mitsubishi
Morgan’s
Motorola
MTEC
Muller
00173
01695
01043, 01334
01296
00173, 00299
01631
01718
01718
01334
00713
01611
01075, 01414
00299, 00713, 01043
01284
01284
01075
00299
00345, 00873
00818
01557
00724, 00722
00710, 00713
00455, 00710, 01083
00200
00173, 00713, 01530
00394
00173, 00710, 01284, 01743
01075, 01334, 01685
00869
01225
00853
01206
00853
00299, 00713, 01043, 01075,
01232, 01334, 01412, 01626
00713
00200
00724
00713, 00818, 01283, 01334,
01375, 01704
00173
01811
00713
00713
00713
00299
01075
00713
00749, 00455
00200, 00713, 01232, 01412
00869, 00856, 01473
01214
01695
Multibroadcast
Multichoice
N
Mx Onda
Myryad
Mysat
MySky
NEC
NEOTION
Netgem
Netsat
Neuf TV
Neuhaus
Neuling
Neusat
Nevir
Next Level
Nikko
Noda Electronic
Nokia
O
Nordmende
OctalTV
Okano
Omega
Opentel
Optex
P
Optimus
Optus
Orbis
Orbitech
Origo
OSAT
P/Sat
Pace
Pacific
Packard Bell
Packsat
Palcom
Panarex
Panasat
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
peeKTon
00642, 00879
00642, 00879, 01333, 01433,
01559, 01560
01659
00200
00713
01693, 01848, 01850
01519
01334
01322
00099, 00887
01322
00713
01232
00713
01659
00869
00200, 00713, 00723
01704
00455, 00723, 00751, 00853,
00873, 01023, 01223, 01723
00455, 01611
01505
00442
00887
01232, 01412
00394, 00713, 01043, 01283,
01611
00724
00879
01232, 01334, 01412
01099, 01100
00497
00345
01232
00200, 00329, 00455, 00497,
00795, 00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356, 01423,
01693, 01717, 01848, 01850
01284, 01375
01111
00710
00299, 01409
01159
00615, 00879, 01333, 01433
00247, 00701, 00455, 00847,
01304, 01404, 01508, 01526,
01527
00173, 00455
01159
00710
00724
01457
Philips
Phonotrend
Pilotime
Pino
Pioneer
Q
R
Planet
Plasmatic
PMB
Polytron
Portland
Preisner
Premier
Prima
Primacom
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Proscan
Proton
QNS
Quadral
Quelle
Radiola
RadioShack
Radix
RCA
S
Rebox
Regal
RFT
Roadstar
Rollmaster
Rover
Rownsonic
SAB
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Samsung
Sat Control
Sat Team
SAT+
Satec
Satelco
Satplus
01142, 00749, 01749, 00775,
00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,
00099, 00710, 00455, 00818,
00200, 00847, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00133, 01442, 01543,
01672
00863, 01200
01339
01334
01142, 00329, 00853, 01308,
01442
00871
00442
00713, 01611
00394
01296
00262, 01101, 01113, 01366
00723, 00853, 00873, 01429
00795
01111
00869
00710
00455
00392, 00566
01535
01367, 01402, 01404
00710
00299
00200
00566, 00775, 00869
00394, 00882, 01113, 01317
00392, 00566, 01142, 00775,
00855, 00143, 01291, 01392,
01442
01214
01251
00200
00713, 00853
01413
00713
01567
01251
00710, 00820
00455
00820, 01114, 01253, 01307,
01690
01377, 01142, 01276, 01108,
01109, 00853, 00863, 01206,
01442, 01458, 01570, 01609,
01700, 01916
01300
00713
01409
00713
01232
01100
Satstation
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
01083
01214
00710, 01206, 01251
00394, 00504, 00863, 01075,
Schwaiger
01083, 01111, 01317, 01334,
01412, 01457
SCS
00299
Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626
SEG
01075, 01087, 01251, 01626
Seleco
00871
Septimo
01375
Serd
01412
Serino
00610
Servimat
01611
ServiSat
00713, 01251
Sharp
01517
Siemens
00173, 01334, 01429
Silva
00299
Skantin
00713
SKR
00713
00856, 00099, 00847, 00887,
SKY
01014, 01175, 01662, 01693,
01847, 01848, 01850
SKY Italia
00853, 01693, 01847, 01848
Sky Television
01014
Sky XL
01251, 01412
Sky+
01175
00713, 01075, 01085, 01200,
Skymaster
01334, 01409, 01567, 01611
Skymax
00200
Skyplus
01232, 01334, 01412
SkySat
00713
Skyvision
01334
SL
00299, 01672
SM Electronic
00713, 01200, 01409
00713, 00882, 01101, 01113,
Smart
01232, 01404, 01413
00639, 01639, 00455, 00847,
Sony
00853, 01524, 01558, 01640
Star
00887
Star Choice
00869
Star Trak
00772, 00869
Starland
00713
Starlite
00200
Stream
01847, 01848
00125, 00713, 00820, 00853,
Strong
00879, 01159, 01284, 01300,
01409, 01626
Sunkai
00123
Sunny
01300
Sunsat
00713
Sunstar
00642
Supernova
00887
SVA
01455
Systec
01334
T
Tantec
Tarbs
Tatung
TBoston
Teac
Tecatel
TechniSat
Technomate
Technosonic
Technotrend
Techwood
Tele System
Electronic
Teleciel
TeleClub
Telefunken
Teleka
Telestar
Telesystem
Televes
Televisa
Telewire
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
Tiny
Tioko
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Topfield
Toshiba
TPS
Triax
U
Trio
TT-micro
Turnsat
Twinner
UEC
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
United
Universum
US Digital
USDTV
00455
01225
00455
01659
01225, 01227, 01251, 01322
01200
00262, 00455, 00863, 01099,
01100, 01195, 01197, 01322
01283, 01610
01672
01429
01284, 01626
V
Visiosat
01251, 01409, 01611, 01801
01043
01367
00710
00262, 00442
01099, 01100, 01251, 01334,
01610, 01626
01801
00455, 01214, 01300, 01334
00887
01232
00713, 01409, 01622, 01672
00392, 00566, 00455, 00710,
00713, 00820, 00847, 00853,
01046, 01175, 01291, 01534,
01543, 01662
00455
01672
00394
01142, 01442
00200
00455, 00713, 01611
01206, 01208, 01545, 01783
00749, 01749, 00790, 00819,
00455, 01285, 01501, 01516,
01530
00820, 01253, 01307
00200, 00713, 00853, 01113,
01227, 01251, 01291, 01296,
01626
01075
01429
00713
00713, 01611
00879, 01162, 01333, 01356
01392, 01640
00724, 00722
00200
01251
00173, 00299, 01087, 01099,
01251
01535
01535
Variosat
Ventana
Vestel
VH Sat
Viasat
ViewSat
Visionic
VisionNet
W
Viva
Vivid
Voom
VTech
Wavelength
Wewa
Wharfedale
Winbox
Wintel
Wisi
Worldsat
X
Xcom
XMS
Xsat
Y
Z
Xtreme
Yakumo
Yamada
Yes
Zehnder
Zenith
Zeta Technology
Zodiac
00173
00200
01251
00299
01682
01232
00125, 01283
01557
00142, 00710, 00713, 01413,
01457, 01718
00856
01162
00869
00818
01232, 01413
00455
01284
01801
00299
00173, 00299, 00455
00123, 00710, 01214, 01251,
01543
00123
01075
00123, 00713, 00847, 01214,
01323
01300
01413
01718
00887
00394, 00504, 00818, 01075,
01232, 01251, 01334, 01412,
01413
00856, 01856
00200
01801
Satellite Receiver/
PVR Combination b1, b3
E
F
G
H
K
L
M
N
O
P
b1
A
B
C
D
@sat
Allvision
Amstrad
Atsat
B@ytronic
British Sky
Broadcasting
BskyB
Bush
Canal Satellite
Comag
Digifusion
DigiQuest
Digiturk
01300
01412
01175
01300
01412
R
01175
S
01175, 01662
01645
01339
01412
01645
01300
01076
01377, 00392, 00639, 01142,
01076, 00099, 01392, 01442,
01640
Dish Network System 01505, 00775
Dishpro
01505, 00775
DMT
01075
Dream Multimedia 01237
Echostar
01505, 00775, 00610
Expressvu
00775
Foxtel
01356
GbSAT
01214
Gecco
01412
Globo
01412
HDT
01159
Hirschmann
01412
Homecast
01680
Hughes Network
01142, 01442
Systems
Humax
01176, 01427, 01675
Huth
01075
Hyundai
01075, 01159
Kaon
01300
Kathrein
00249, 00658, 01221, 01561
LG
01075
Maximum
01334
Mediacom
01206
Medion
01412
Microstar
01075
Morgan’s
01412
Motorola
00869
MTEC
01214
Multichoice
01333, 01559, 01560
MySky
01693, 01848, 01850
NEOTION
01334
Nokia
01023
Opentel
01412
Orbis
01412
Pace
01175, 01356, 01423, 01850
Panasonic
01304
Philips
01142, 00099, 01442
Pilotime
01339
Proscan
00392
Radix
01317
RCA
01392
Rebox
01214
Sagem
01253, 01307
Samsung
01206, 01442, 01570, 01609
Sat Control
01300
Schneider
01206
Schwaiger
01075, 01412
Sedea Electronique 01206
Serd
01412
SKY
01175, 01693, 01848, 01850
DirecTV
T
X
Z
SKY Italia
Sky XL
Skymaster
Skyplus
Sony
Star Choice
Strong
Sunny
TechniSat
Thomson
Topfield
TPS
Xtreme
Zehnder
01848
01412
01075
01412
00639, 01640
00869
01300
01300
01195, 01197
01175, 01534, 01662
01206, 01545, 01783
01253, 01307
01300
01075, 01412
Hughes Network
Systems
Philips
Samsung
20739
b3
H
P
S
20739
20739
Television
1
A
888
A-Mark
A.R. Systems
Accent
Accuscan
Accuscreen
Acoustic Research
Action
Acura
Addison
ADL
Admiral
Advent
Adventuri
Adyson
AEG
Agashi
Agna
Aiko
Aim
Aiwa
Akai
10264
10047, 10054, 10009
10037, 10352, 10374, 10455,
10556
10009, 10037
10047
10001
11269
10030, 10650
10009
10092, 10108, 10653
11217
10047, 10054, 10017, 10051,
10093, 10463, 10180, 10163,
10264, 10418
10761, 10783, 10815, 10817,
10842, 10876, 11933
10000
10217
11163, 11556
10217, 10264
10150
10092, 10009, 10035, 10037,
10217, 10264, 10361, 10371,
10433
10706, 10037, 10455, 10805
10264, 10701, 11904, 11911
10000, 10060, 10812, 10702,
10178, 10030, 10145, 10602,
10606, 10631, 10648, 10672,
10714, 10715, 11207, 11537,
11675, 11676, 11903, 10556,
10548, 10480, 10433, 10371,
10361, 10264, 10218, 10217,
10208, 10163, 10037, 10035,
10009
PRESET CODE
Akashi
Akiba
Akira
Akito
Akura
Alaron
Alba
Albatron
Alfide
All-Tel
Alleron
Allorgan
Allstar
Ambassador
America Action
American High
Amplivision
Amstrad
Amtron
Anam
Anam National
Andersson
Anglo
Anhua
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
Aolinpike
Apex Digital
AR
Arc En Ciel
Arcam
Ardem
Aristocrat
Aristona
ART
Arthur Martin
ASA
Asberg
Asora
Astra
Asuka
ATD
Atlantic
10009, 10860
10037, 10218, 10455
10418
10037
10171, 10009, 10037, 10163,
10218, 10264, 10668, 10714,
11037, 11498, 11556, 11982
10170
10009, 10036, 10037, 10073,
10163, 10218, 10352, 10370,
10371, 10418, 10443, 10487,
10668, 10714, 11037
10700, 10843
10672
10865, 11269
10030, 10170
10217
10037
10150
10180
10000, 10060
10217, 10370
10000, 10171, 10009, 10011,
10037, 10163, 10218, 10264,
10362, 10371, 10433, 10648,
11037, 11982
10000, 10180
10250, 10180, 10009, 10037,
10700, 10861
10250, 10037, 10650
11149, 11163
10009, 10264
10051
10009, 10037, 10264
10009, 10037, 10163, 10370,
10374, 10668
10451, 10093, 10180, 10060,
10178, 10030, 10092, 10009,
10108
10264
10156, 10748, 10879, 10765,
10767, 11217, 11943
10352, 10556
10109
10217
10037, 10714
10163
10037, 10556
11037
10163
10070
10037
10009
10037
10217, 10218, 10264
10698
10001, 10037
PRESET CODE
Atori
Auchan
Audinac
Audiosonic
Audioton
Audiovox
Audioworld
Aumark
Autovox
Aventura
AVP
Awa
B
Axion
Axxent
Baier
Baihe
Baile
Baird
Bang & Olufsen
Baohuashi
Baosheng
Barco
Basic Line
Bastide
Bauer
Baur
Baysonic
Bazin
Beaumark
Beijing
Beko
Belcor
Bell & Howell
Belson
Belstar
BenQ
Beon
Berthen
Best
Bestar
Bestar-Daewoo
Binatone
Black Diamond
10009
10163
10180
10009, 10037, 10109, 10217,
10218, 10264, 10370, 10374,
10486, 10714, 10715, 10820
10217, 10264, 10370, 10486
10451, 10180, 10092, 10623,
10802, 10875, 11937, 11951,
11952
10698
10060
10217
10171
10000
10451, 10009, 10011, 10036,
10108, 10217, 10264, 10374,
10606
11937, 11958
10009
10876
10009, 10264
10001, 10009, 10374, 10661
10037, 10073, 10109, 10208,
10217, 10343, 11196
10565
10264
10009, 10817
10163, 10556
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10218, 10374, 10455, 10556,
10668, 11037, 11163
10217
10805
10037, 10195, 10361, 10455,
10512
10180
10217
10017, 10178, 10030
10812, 10001, 10009, 10208,
10226, 10264, 10374, 10661,
10817, 10821
10037, 10195, 10370, 10418,
10486, 10606, 10714, 10715,
10808, 11037
10030
10054, 10017, 10154, 10093
10698, 11191
11037
11032, 11756
10037, 10163, 10218, 10418
10668
10370
10037, 10370, 10374
10374
10217
10614, 10820, 10821, 11037,
11163, 11909
Blackway
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boots
BPL
Bradford
Brandt
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Brother
BSR
BTC
Bush
C
Caihong
Cailing
Candle
Canton
Capehart
Capetronic
Capsonic
Carad
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Celestial
Centrex
Centrum
Centurion
CGE
Changcheng
Changfei
Changfeng
Changhai
10218
10036, 10170, 10195, 10200,
10327, 10455
10037, 10218, 10455, 10487,
10499, 10556, 10668, 10714,
10715, 11037, 11191, 11363
10009, 10217
10037, 10208
10180
10109, 10287, 10335, 10560,
10625, 10714
10037, 10418, 10486, 10668
10037, 10362
10217
10178, 10030
10236, 10463, 10180, 11911,
11938
10264
10163
10218
11900, 11556, 11037, 10778,
10714, 10698, 10668, 10661,
10614, 10556, 10487, 10374,
10371, 10361, 10335, 10264,
10218, 10217, 10208, 10163,
10037, 10036, 10009
10009, 10817
10748
10030
10218
10017, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10036
10030
10264
10610, 10668, 11037
10037, 10455
10030
10036, 10037, 10070
10054, 10170
10009, 10037
10037
10037, 10218
10037, 10217
10000
10765
10767, 10819, 10820, 10821
10780
11037
10037
10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
10051, 10001, 10009, 10264,
10374, 10661, 10817
10009, 10374, 10817
10264, 10817
10009, 10817
10156, 10765, 10009, 10264,
10508, 10767, 10783, 10817,
10819, 10820, 10821, 11008,
11156
Chengdu
10009, 10817
Ching Tai
10092, 10009
10000, 10180, 10092, 10009,
Chun Yun
10700, 10843
Chunfeng
10009, 10264
Chung Hsin
10180, 10053, 10036, 10108
Chunsun
10009, 10817
Cimline
10009, 10218
Cinema
10672
Cineral
10451, 10092
Cinex
10648, 11556
Citek
10047
10054, 10000, 10451, 10463,
Citizen
10180, 10060, 10030, 10171,
10092, 10001, 10035
City
10009
Clarion
10180
Clarivox
10037, 10070, 10418
Classic
10030, 10092, 10499
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
Clatronic
10264, 10370, 10371, 10714
Clayton
11037
CMS Hightec
10217
10047, 10054, 10017, 10060,
Colortyme
10178, 10030
Commercial Solutions 11447, 10047
Concorde
10009
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,
Condor
10418
Conia
10820, 10821, 11498
Conic
10178
Conrac
10808
10156, 10145, 10009, 10264,
Conrowa
10698, 11156, 11170
Contec
10180, 10009, 10036, 10037
Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487
Cosmel
10009, 10037
Craig
10180, 10171
10054, 10000, 10180, 10030,
Crosley
10171, 10074, 10163, 10370
10093, 10180, 10053, 10009,
10037, 10208, 10370, 10418,
Crown
10486, 10487, 10606, 10672,
10712, 10714, 10715, 11037
Crown Mustang
10672
CS Electronics
10218
CTX
11756
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,
Curtis Mathes
10060, 10702, 10178, 10030,
10145, 10166, 10037, 10035,
11147, 11347
CXC
10180
Cybertron
10218
Cytronix
11298
D-Vision
10037, 10556, 11982
Changhong
D
Daewoo
Dainichi
Dansai
Dantax
Datsura
Dawa
Daytek
Dayton
Daytron
Dayu
De Graaf
Decca
Degraff
Deitron
Dell
Denko
Denon
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
Digatron
Digiline
Digital Life
Digitex
Digitor
Digix Media
Dixi
DL
Domeos
Domland
Dongda
Donghai
Dream Vision
DSE
DTS
Dual
Dual Tec
Dumont
Durabrand
Dux
Dwin
Dynatech
Dynatron
10154, 10451, 10180, 10178,
10030, 10092, 11661, 10634,
10661, 10672, 10700, 10860,
10865, 10876, 10880, 11755,
11756, 11909, 10623, 10556,
10499, 10374, 10264, 10218,
10217, 10170, 10109, 10108,
10037, 10036, 10009
10218
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10208, 10217
10370, 10486, 10714, 10715
10208
10009, 10037
10672, 11207
10092, 10009, 11207
10180, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10009, 10036, 10037, 10374
10374, 10661
10163, 10208, 10548
10037, 10217
10163, 10208
10374
11080, 11178
10264
10145, 10511
10037, 10587
10009, 10037
10037
10706, 10009, 10371, 10672,
10698, 10820, 10860
10037
10037, 10668
10872
10820
10037
10880
10009, 10037, 10217
10587, 10780, 10872
10668
10394
10009
10009
11164, 11704
10698, 10820, 11556
10009
10037, 10217, 10343, 10352,
10394, 11037, 11137
10217
10017, 10180, 10178, 10070,
10217
10463, 10180, 10178, 10171,
11034, 11463
10037
10093
10217
10037
E
F
Easy Living
Eaton
Ecco
ECE
Edison-Minerva
11248
10060
10773
10037
10487
10037, 10217, 10218, 10362,
Elbe
10610
Elcit
10163
Electroband
10000
Electrograph
11755
10154, 10000, 10463, 10150,
Electrohome
10178, 10030, 10073
Elekta
10009, 10264
Elfunk
11037, 11208
ELG
10037
Elin
10009, 10037, 10361, 10548
Elite
10037, 10218
Elta
10009, 10264
Emerald
10178
10047, 10017, 10154, 10451,
10236, 10463, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10171, 11944, 11911,
Emerson
11909, 10714, 10668, 10623,
10486, 10036, 10371, 10370,
10361, 10037, 10195, 10170,
10070, 10073
Envision
10030, 10813
Enzer
10860
Erae
11371
Erres
10037
ESA
10812, 10171, 11944
ESC
10037, 10217
Ether
10030, 10009
Etron
10001, 10009, 10163, 10820
Eurofeel
10217, 10264
Euroman
10037, 10217, 10264, 10370
Europa
10037
Europhon
10037, 10109, 10217
Evesham Technology 11248
Evolution
11756
Expert
10163
Exquisit
10037
Feilang
10009
Feilu
10009, 10817
Feiyan
10264
Feiyue
10009, 10817
Fenner
10009, 10374
Fer0
10335
10053, 10037, 10073, 10109,
10195, 10287, 10335, 10343,
Ferguson
10443, 10548, 10560, 10625,
11037
10171, 10037, 10163, 10217,
Fidelity
10264, 10361, 10371, 10512
Filsai
10217
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
Finlandia
10548
Finlux
Firstar
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Force
Formenti
Fortress
Fraba
Friac
Frontech
Fujimaro
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
G
Furi
Furichi
Futronic
Futuretech
Galaxi
Galaxis
Ganxin
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
Gemini
General
General Technic
Genesis
Genexxa
Gericom
Gevalt
Giant
Gibralter
Go Video
Go Vision
Goldfunk
GoldStar
10037, 10070, 10163, 10217,
10346, 10480, 10556, 10631,
10714, 10715, 10808, 11556
10236, 10009
10009, 10037, 10208, 10217,
10361, 10374, 10556, 10668,
10714, 10808, 11037, 11191,
11363, 11371
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10036, 10208, 10217, 10361,
10370
10037, 10218, 10264, 10455,
10610
11149
10037, 10163
10093
10037, 10370
10009, 10037, 10370, 10499,
10610
10009, 10163, 10217, 10264
10865, 11498
10009, 10217, 10352, 10683,
10809, 10853
10009, 10217, 10683
10808, 10809, 11163, 11298
10000, 10180, 10171, 10264,
10668, 11271, 11904
10145, 10264, 10817
10860
10264, 10860
10180
10037
10037, 10370
10817
11755, 11756
10009, 10163, 10218, 10374
11447, 10047, 11454, 10000,
10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,
10060, 10178, 10030, 10092,
11922, 11917, 11347, 11147,
10625, 10560, 10335, 10035
10037, 10163, 10217, 10361
10009, 10163, 10374
10047
10109, 10287
10009
10009, 10037
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218
10808, 10865, 10880, 11217,
11298
11371
10009, 10217
10017, 10000, 10030
10060, 10886
11937
10668
10047, 10054, 10154, 10178,
10030, 10715, 10714, 10606,
10455, 10361, 10217, 10163,
10109, 10073, 10037, 10036,
10009, 10001
Gooding
Goodmans
Gorenje
GPM
Gradiente
Graetz
Gran Prix
Granada
Grandin
Gronic
Grundig
H
Grundy
Grunkel
Grunpy
H&B
Haaz
Haier
Haihong
Haiyan
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanimex
Hankook
Hanseatic
Hantarex
Hantor
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Harsper
Harvard
Harwa
Harwood
Hauppauge
Havermy
HCM
Heathkit
Helios
Hello Kitty
10487
10000, 11909, 11900, 11163,
11037, 10880, 10808, 10714,
10668, 10661, 10634, 10625,
10587, 10560, 10556, 10499,
10487, 10480, 10374, 10371,
10343, 10335, 10264, 10218,
10217, 10037, 10036, 10035,
10011, 10009
10370
10218
10053, 10037, 10170
10163, 10361, 10371, 10487,
10714, 11163
10648
10036, 10037, 10108, 10163,
10208, 10217, 10226, 10343,
10548, 10560
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,
10374, 10455, 10610, 10668,
10714, 10715, 10865, 10880,
11037, 11191
10217
10706, 10009, 10036, 10037,
10070, 10163, 10195, 10443,
10487, 10556, 10587, 10672,
10683, 11371
10180, 10195
11163
10180
10808
10706
11034, 10037, 10508, 10587,
10698, 11017
10009
10264, 10817
10217, 10264
10236, 10180, 10178
10217
10218
10180, 10178, 10030
10009, 10037, 10217, 10361,
10370, 10394, 10499, 10556,
10634, 10661, 10714, 10808
10009, 10037, 10865
10037
10000, 10180, 10060, 10178,
10030, 11904
10054
10865
10180
10773, 11196, 11269
10009, 10037, 10487
10037
10093
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10418
10017
10865
10451
Hema
Hewlett Packard
Hifivox
Highline
Hikona
Hikone
Hinari
Hisawa
Hisense
Hitachi
Hitachi Fujian
Hitec
Hitsu
Hoeher
Home Electronics
Hongmei
Hongyan
Hornyphon
Hoshai
HP
Hua Tun
Huafa
Huanghaimei
Huanghe
Huanglong
Huangshan
Huanyu
Huaqiang
Huari
Hugoson
Huodateji
Hygashi
Hyper
Hypersonic
Hypson
Hyundai
I
Iberia
ICE
ICeS
Iiyama
10009, 10217
11494, 11502
10109
10037, 10264
10218
10218
10009, 10036, 10037, 10163,
10208, 10218, 10264, 10352,
10443
10218, 10455, 10610, 10714
10156, 10748, 10145, 10009,
10208, 10508, 10556, 10780,
10821, 10860, 11022, 11156,
11170, 11208, 11363
10047, 10054, 10017, 10000,
11256, 10156, 10051, 10150,
10178, 10030, 11145, 10145,
10092, 10744, 10877, 10634,
11037, 11137, 11149, 11156,
11170, 11225, 11576, 11904,
11960, 10578, 10548, 10508,
10499, 10481, 10480, 10343,
10217, 10163, 10109, 10108,
10037, 10036, 10035, 10009
10150, 10108, 10860
10698
10009, 10218, 10455, 10610
10714, 10865, 11163, 11556
10606
10093, 10009, 10264, 10817
10264, 10817
10037
10218, 10455
11494, 11502
10009
10145, 10009
10009
10009, 10817
10009
10009, 10264, 10817
10217, 10264, 10374, 10817
10264
10145, 10264
11217
10051
10217
10009, 10217
10361
10037, 10217, 10264, 10455,
10486, 10556, 10668, 10714,
10715, 11037
10849, 10860, 10865, 10876,
11556
10037
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10371
10218
10877, 11217
Ima
Imperial
Imperial Crown
Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Inno Hit
Innova
Innowert
Inotech
Insignia
Inteq
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITT Nokia
J
ITV
IX
JBL
JCB
JDV
Jean
JEC
Jensen
Jiahua
JiaLiCai
JIL
Jinfeng
Jinque
Jinta
Jinxing
JMB
JNC
Jocel
Johnson
Jubilee
Juhua
Jutan
10236, 10180, 10178
10037, 10074, 10370, 10418
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,
10661
10037
10054
11164
10163, 10487, 10610, 10714
10009
10009, 10217, 10218, 11163
10037
10865, 11298
10773, 10820
10171, 11517
10017, 10145
10009, 10037, 10264
10037, 10109, 10163, 10200,
10327, 10361, 10512
10037, 11909
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10394, 10455, 10486,
10487
10009, 10037, 10218, 10371
10037, 10218, 10455
10217
10037, 10218, 10264, 10371
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
10480, 10548, 10610
10070, 10163, 10195, 10208,
10346, 10361, 10480, 10548,
10606, 10610
10037, 10264, 10374
10877
10054
10000
11982
10156, 10051, 10236, 10092,
10009, 10036
10035
10761, 10815, 10817, 11933
10051
10009, 10264
10030
10051, 10208, 10226, 10817
10009, 10264, 10817
10009, 10264
10054, 10156, 10145, 10009,
10037, 10264, 10556, 10698,
10817, 10821, 11011
10443, 10499, 10556, 10634
10876
10712
10455
10556
10264, 10817
10030
PRESET CODE
JVC
K
Kaige
Kaisui
Kambrook
Kamp
Kangli
Kangyi
Kapsch
Karcher
Kathrein
Kawa
Kawasho
KB Aristocrat
KDS
KEC
Kendo
Kennedy
Kennex
Kenwood
Khind
KIC
Kiota
Kioto
Kiton
KLH
KLL
Kloss
Kneissel
Kolin
Kolster
Kongque
Konichi
Konig
Konka
Kontakt
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
Kreisen
KTV
Kuaile
Kulun
Kunlun
10054, 10093, 10463, 10053,
10030, 10070, 10036, 10218,
10371, 10418, 10508, 10606,
10650, 10653, 10683, 10731,
11253, 11923
10009, 10264, 10817
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10455
10217
10017, 10180, 10217
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,
10661, 10817
10009, 10264
10163, 10361
10264, 10370, 10606, 10610,
10714, 10778, 11556
10556
10371
10030
10163
11498
10180, 10060
10037, 10362, 10370, 10610,
10648, 11037
10163
10668, 11037
10180, 10030
10706
10217
10001, 10371, 10455
10706, 10556
10037, 10668
10156, 10180, 10765, 10767,
11962
10037
10030
10037, 10362, 10370, 10374,
10499, 10556, 10610
10180, 10150, 10053, 10036,
10108, 11331
10037, 10218
10009, 10264, 10817
10009
10037
10180, 10037, 10218, 10371,
10418, 10587, 10641, 10714,
10817, 11084
10487
10037
10370
10037
10009
10876
10463, 10180, 10030, 10217
10009, 10264
10009
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10374, 10661, 10817
PRESET CODE
L
Kyoshu
Kyoto
L&S Electronic
Lark
LaSAT
Lavis
Leader
Lecson
Legend
Lenco
Lenoir
Lexsor
Leyco
LG
Liesenk & Tter
Liesenkotter
Lifetec
Lihua
Lloyd’s
Local India TV
Local Malaysia TV
Lodos
Loewe
Logik
Logix
Longjiang
Luker
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxor
LXI
M
M Electronic
Madison
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnasonic
10418
10163, 10217
10714, 10808, 10865
10154
10486
11037
10009
10037
10009
10037, 10374, 10587
10009
11196
10037, 10264
10054, 11265, 10060, 10178,
10030, 11758, 11637, 11191,
11178, 10856, 10715, 10714,
10700, 10698, 10556, 10370,
10361, 10217, 10163, 10109,
10108, 10037, 10009, 10001
10037
10037, 10327
10009, 10037, 10218, 10374,
10668, 10683, 10714, 11037,
11137
10817
10236, 10180, 10030, 10001,
10009, 11904
10009, 10208, 10602
10698
11037
10037, 10370, 10512, 10633,
10790
10236, 10180, 10060, 10001,
10009, 10011, 10371, 10698,
10773, 10880, 11037, 11217
10668
10264, 10817
11982
10009, 10163, 10362, 10374,
11037
10037, 10073, 10163, 10217,
10264, 10361, 10556
10009, 10037
10163, 10208, 10217, 10346,
10361, 10480, 10548, 10631,
11037, 11163
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,
10171, 10166, 10037, 10036,
10035, 10001, 10208
10009, 10037, 10109, 10163,
10195, 10217, 10287, 10343,
10346, 10374, 10480, 10512,
10634, 10661, 10714
10037
11498
10054, 10163
10073
10054, 10000, 10156, 10093,
10030, 10092, 10109
Magnavox
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor
Manesth
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
Master’s
Mastro
Masuda
Matsui
Matsushita
Maxdorf
Maxent
Maxim
MCE
Meck
Mediator
Medion
Megapower
Megas
Megatron
MEI
Meile
Memorex
Memphis
Mercury
Mermaid
Metronic
Metz
MGA
MGN Technology
Micro Genius
Micromaxx
Microstar
MicroTEK
Midland
Mikomi
10047, 11454, 10054, 10154,
10000, 10250, 10051, 10180,
10060, 10030, 10171, 10092,
10706, 11944, 11904, 11755,
11254, 10802, 10780, 10011,
10035, 10037, 10036
10037, 10648, 10714, 10715
10017
10264
10035, 10037, 10217, 10264
10037, 10668, 10778, 10876,
11037, 11267
11454, 10054, 10030, 10037,
10556, 10704, 10855
10009, 10037, 10217, 10374,
10714, 10715
10499
10053, 10706, 10698, 10780
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10371
11037, 10744, 10714, 10556,
10487, 10455, 10443, 10433,
10371, 10352, 10335, 10217,
10208, 10195, 10163, 10037,
10036, 10035, 10011, 10009
10250, 10051, 10650
10773
11755, 11756
11556, 11982
10009
10698
10037, 10556
10037, 10512, 10556, 10668,
10698, 10714, 10808, 10880,
11037, 11137, 11248, 11900
10700
10610
10047, 10178, 10145, 10009
11037
10264, 10817
10154, 10250, 10463, 10180,
10150, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10009, 10035, 10037, 10195,
10877, 11037, 11911
10009
10060, 10001, 10009, 10037
10037
10625
10037, 10195, 10367, 10388,
10447, 10587, 10668, 10746,
11163
10150, 10178, 10030, 10218,
10374
10178
10150
10037, 10668, 10714, 10808,
11037
10808
10820, 10860
10047, 10017, 10051
11037, 11149
Minato
Minerva
Minoka
Mirror
Mitsubishi
Mivar
Monaco
Monivision
Morgan’s
Motorola
MTC
MTlogic
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Murphy
Musikland
Mx Onda
Myryad
N
NAD
Naiko
Nakimura
Nanbao
Nansheng
Narita
NAT
National
NEC
Neckermann
NEI
Neovia
Netsat
NetTV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
Newave
Nikkai
Nikkei
Nikko
Nikkodo
10037, 10556
10070, 10108, 10195, 10487
10037
11900
10154, 10250, 10093, 10236,
10180, 11250, 10150, 10178,
10030, 11917, 11037, 10836,
10817, 10556, 10512, 10195,
10108, 10037, 10036, 10011
10217
10009
10700, 10843
10037
10054, 10051, 10093, 10150
10180, 10060, 10030, 10092,
10011, 10370, 10512
10714
10051, 10009, 10208, 10226,
10264, 10817
10037, 10486, 10668, 11037,
11556
10180, 10009, 10037, 10217,
10264, 10370, 10486
10163
10218
11498
10556
10156, 10178, 10166, 10037,
10361, 10866, 11156
10037, 10606, 11982
10037, 10374
10009, 10264
10264, 10817
11982
10226
10051, 10208, 10226, 10508
10047, 10154, 10156, 10051,
10053, 10178, 10030, 11704,
11270, 11170, 10817, 10704,
10661, 10653, 10508, 10499,
10455, 10374, 10264, 10217,
10170, 10036, 10011, 10009
10037, 10200, 10327, 10370,
10418, 10556
10037, 10163, 10371
10865, 10876, 11371
10037
11755
10009, 10037, 10218, 10556,
10610, 10714
10009, 10037, 10217, 10343,
10556
10218
10093, 10178, 10092, 10009
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10163, 10217, 10218, 10264
10714
10178, 10030, 10092
10178, 10030, 10092
Nishi
Nobliko
Nogamatic
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
O
Normerel
Novatronic
NTC
Nu-Tec
Nyon
Oceanic
Odeon
Okano
Olevia
Omega
Omni
Onida
Onimax
Onwa
Opera
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
Orcom
Orion
Orline
Ormond
Osaki
Osio
Oso
Osume
Otic
Otto Versand
P
Pace
Pacific
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panashiba
10030
10070
10109
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
10374, 10480, 10548, 10606,
10610, 10631
10748, 10824
10217
10037, 10109, 10195, 10287,
10343, 10560, 10714
10037
10037, 10374
10092
10455, 10698, 10820
10000
10163, 10208, 10361, 10548
10264
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370
11144, 11240, 11331, 11610
10264
10748, 10698, 10780, 10872
10053, 11253
10714
10180, 10218, 10371, 10433,
10602
10037
10154, 10250, 10093, 10180,
10150, 10178, 10030, 10166,
10650
10887
10093
10037
11504
10017, 10236, 10463, 10180,
10178, 11463, 10011, 10037,
10264, 10443, 10556, 10714,
10880, 11196, 11911
10037, 10218
10668, 11037
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10374, 10556
10037
10218
10036, 10037, 10218
11498
10093, 10036, 10037, 10109,
10195, 10217, 10226, 10343,
10361, 10512, 10556
10092
10037, 10443, 10556, 10714,
11037, 11137
10037, 10163, 10200, 10217,
10327, 10370, 10418, 10556,
10714, 11137
10001, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10418, 10698, 10773,
10778, 11196, 11269, 11904
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
10001
Panasonic
Panavision
Panda
Pathe Cinema
Pathe Marconi
Pausa
Paxonic
PCE
Penney
Perdio
Perfekt
Petters
Philco
Philharmonic
Philips
Phocus
Phoenix
Phonola
Pilot
Pioneer
Pionier
Plantron
Playsonic
Polaroid
Poppy
Portland
Powerpoint
Prandoni-Prince
Precision
Premier
President
Prima
Princeton
Prinston
Prinz
Prism
10054, 10000, 10156, 10250,
10051, 10236, 10030, 11947,
11946, 11941, 11480, 11310,
11291, 11271, 10853, 10650,
10548, 10508, 10367, 10361,
10226, 10208, 10163, 10108,
10037, 10035
10037
10051, 10706, 10009, 10208,
10226, 10264, 10508, 10698,
10780, 10817, 10821
10163
10109
10009
10060, 10030
Profex
Profi
Profilo
Profitronic
10156, 10060
10047, 10000, 10156, 10250,
10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10035, 10036, 10037, 10070,
10108, 11347
10037, 10163
10037
11523
10054, 10451, 10463, 10180,
10178, 10030, 10145, 11661,
10037, 10074, 10163, 10370,
10418
10217
11454, 10054, 10017, 10000,
10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,
10092, 11961, 11756, 11254,
10690, 10556, 10512, 10374,
10361, 10343, 10200, 10108,
10037, 10009
10714
10037, 10163, 10370, 10486
10037, 10556
10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10706, 10011
10166, 10011, 10037, 10109,
10163, 10170, 10287, 10361,
10370, 10486, 10512, 10679,
10760, 10866, 11260
10370, 10486, 11556
10009, 10037, 10264
10037, 10217, 10714, 10715
10765, 10865, 11276, 11316,
11341, 11498, 11523
10009
10451, 10092, 10374
10037, 10487, 10698
10361
10236, 10180, 10217
10009, 10264
10860
10761, 10009, 10264, 10783,
10815, 10817, 11269, 11933
10700
11037
10361
10250, 10051
Proton
10009, 10163, 10361
10009
11556
10037
10037, 10073, 10625, 10634,
11037
11447, 10047, 11347, 11922
10156
10037, 10217, 10370, 10371,
10374, 10668, 10714
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264,
10418, 10486, 10668, 11037
10178, 10030, 10001, 10009
Proview
11498
ProVision
Pulsar
Pulser
Pvision
Pye
Pymi
10037, 10556, 10714, 11037
10017, 10092
10178, 10092
10876, 11191
10037, 10374, 10556
10009
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10817
10051, 10218
10150, 10178
10250, 10051, 10009, 10035,
10650, 10865
10011, 10037, 10070, 10074,
10109, 10195, 10200, 10327,
10361, 10512, 10668, 11037
10036
10036
10037
10047
10163, 10218
10037, 10217, 10556
10037
10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10030, 10037, 11904
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,
10418, 10648, 10668, 11037
10070
10036, 10602
10070
11447, 10047, 11454, 10054,
10000, 10051, 10093, 10178,
10030, 10092, 11958, 11953,
11948, 11922, 11917, 11547,
11347, 11247, 11147, 11047,
10679, 10625, 10560, 10090
10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10030
10037, 10418
10037
10036, 10163, 10346, 10361,
10548
10037
10037, 10668, 11037
10865, 10876, 10877, 11207,
11298
Proline
Proscan
Prosco
Prosonic
Protec
Protech
Q
Qingdao
Quadral
Quartz
Quasar
Quelle
R
Questa
Questar
R-Line
Rabbit
Radialva
Radiola
Radiomarelli
RadioShack
Radiotone
Rank
Rank Arena
RBM
RCA
Realistic
Recor
Rectiligne
Rediffusion
Redstar
Reflex
Relisys
Remotec
Reoc
Revox
Rex
RFT
Rinex
Roadstar
Rolson
Rover
Rowa
Royal Lux
Runco
Ruyi
S
Saba
Sagem
Saige
Saisho
Saivod
Sakai
Sakyno
Salora
Salsa
Sampo
Samsung
Sandra
Sanjian
Sanky
Sansui
Santon
Sanyo
Sanyong
Sanyuan
Saville
10250, 10093, 10145, 10171,
10037
10714
10037
10163, 10264
10037, 10264
10773
10009, 10037, 10218, 10264,
10418, 10668, 10714, 11037,
11900
11371
10036, 10877
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,
10587, 10698, 10712, 10817
10335, 10370
10017, 10060, 10030
10817
10250, 10109, 10163, 10287,
10335, 10343, 10361, 10498,
10548, 10560, 10625, 10714
10455, 10610, 10618
10009, 10817
10009, 10011, 10163, 10217,
10264
10037, 10668, 10712, 11037,
11163, 11556, 11982
10163
10455
10163, 10208, 10361, 10480,
10548, 10631
10335
10047, 10154, 10093, 10178,
10030, 10171, 10092, 10009,
10036, 10650, 10700, 11755,
11756
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10156, 10093, 10060, 10812,
10702, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10814, 10766, 10718, 10618,
10587, 10817, 10821, 11060,
11249, 11312, 11903, 11959,
10556, 10371, 10370, 10362,
10264, 10226, 10217, 10208,
10163, 10090, 10037, 10036,
10035, 10009
10217
10264
10060, 10030
10463, 10060, 10030, 10706,
10037, 10371, 10455, 10602,
10714, 10861, 11371, 11537,
11904, 11911
10009
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10156, 10463, 10180, 10145,
10171, 11755, 11208, 10704,
10508, 10370, 10264, 10217,
10208, 10170, 10163, 10108,
10088, 10037, 10036, 10011,
10009
10037
10093, 10009, 10817
10060
SBR
Sceptre
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scotch
Scotland
Scott
Sears
Seaway
Seelver
SEG
SEI
Sei-Sinudyne
Seleco
Semivox
Semp
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Shancha
Shanghai
Shaofeng
Sharp
Shen Ying
Shencai
Sheng Chia
Shenyang
Sherwood
Shintoshi
Shivaki
Show
Siarem
Siemens
Siera
Siesta
Signature
Silva
Silva Schneider
Silvano
Silver
SilverCrest
10037, 10556
11217
10361, 10374, 10486, 10548,
10606, 10714, 11191
11982, 11904, 11137, 11037,
10714, 10668, 10648, 10556,
10394, 10371, 10361, 10352,
10343, 10218, 10217, 10163,
10070, 10037
10178
10163
10236, 10180, 10178, 10030
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,
10171, 10166, 10035, 10036,
10037, 10001, 10208, 11904
10634
11037
10009, 10036, 10037, 10217,
10218, 10264, 10362, 10487,
10668, 11037, 11163
10037, 10163
10037
10163, 10264, 10346, 10362,
10371
10180
10156
10009
10035
10093, 10455, 10610
10264, 10817
10009, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10817
10145, 10817
10054, 10093, 10180, 10053,
10030, 10009, 10036, 10200,
10650, 10653, 10668, 11193,
11393, 11917
10092, 10009
10145, 10009, 10264
10093, 10236, 10009
10009, 10264, 10817
10009
10037
10178, 10037, 10374, 10443,
10556
10009, 10418
10163
10145, 10037, 10195, 10200,
10327
10037, 10556
10370
10047, 10093, 10030
10037, 10361, 10648
10037, 11556
10587
10036, 10361, 10455, 10715
11037
Simpson
10178, 10030, 10011
10060, 10092, 10009, 10037,
Singer
10335, 10371, 10433, 11537
Sinotec
10773
Sinudyne
10037, 10163, 10361
Skantic
10163
SKY
10037, 10880, 11504
Sky Brazil
10880
Sky-North
10037
Skygiant
10180
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,
Skyworth
10698, 10805, 10817, 11115
Sliding
10865, 10880
SLX
10668
Smaragd
10487
Soemtron
10865, 11298
Solar Drape
10000
Solavox
10037, 10163, 10361, 10548
Sole
10813
Sonawa
10218
Songba
10009
Soniko
10037
Sonitron
10208, 10217, 10370
Sonneclair
10037
Sonoko
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
Sonolor
10163, 10208, 10361, 10548
Sontec
10009, 10037, 10370
10017, 10154, 11100, 10000,
10150, 10053, 10011, 10036,
Sony
10037, 10074, 10353, 10650,
11505, 11651, 11751, 11904
Sound & Vision
10218, 10374
Soundesign
10180, 10178
Soundwave
10037, 10418, 10715
Sova
11952
10156, 10051, 10060, 10178,
Sowa
10092, 10036, 10226
Soyea
10773
Spectra
10009
Spectravision
10156, 10178
Spectroniq
11498
Squareview
10171
SR2000
10154, 10171
Ssangyong
10009
SSS
10180
Staksonic
10009
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
Standard
10374, 11037
Standard Components 10009, 10218
10236, 10180, 10009, 10037,
Starlite
10163, 10264
Stenway
10218
Stern
10163, 10264
Stevison
11982
Strato
10009, 10037, 10264
PRESET CODE
Strong
Studio Experience
Stylandia
Sunkai
Sunstar
Sunwatt
Sunwood
Superla
Superscan
Supersonic
SuperTech
Supra
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
SV2000
SVA
Svasa
Swisstec
Sydney
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synco
T
Syntax
Sysline
T+A
Tacico
Tai Yi
Taishan
Tandberg
Tandy
Targa
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL
TCM
Teac
Tec
Tech Line
Techica
Technica
11149, 11163
10843
10217
10218, 10455, 10487, 10610,
10865
10009, 10037, 10264, 10371
10455
10037
10217
10093, 10864, 11944
10009, 10208, 10455, 10805
10009, 10037, 10218, 10556
10178, 10009, 10374
10000
10218, 10287, 10335
10009
10054
10748, 10587, 10865, 10870,
10871, 10872
10455
10880, 11504
10217
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,
10092, 10036, 10037, 10876,
11271, 11904, 11944
10000, 10180, 10178, 10171,
11904, 11944
10000, 10451, 10093, 10060,
10178, 10092, 10036
11144, 11240, 11331
10037
10447
10178, 10092, 10009
10009
10009, 10374, 10817
10109, 10361, 10367
10093, 10163, 10217, 10218
11371
10092, 10036, 10163, 10170,
10217, 10650
10054, 10154, 10000, 10156,
10051, 10060, 10037, 10036,
10011, 10009, 10217, 11156,
11191, 11248, 11254, 11371,
11556, 11756
10706, 10698, 11027, 11537
10714, 10808
10154, 10178, 10171, 10706,
11755, 11149, 11037, 10714,
10712, 10698, 10668, 10512,
10455, 10418, 10264, 10217,
10170, 10037, 10009
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10335
10037, 10668, 11163
10218
11982
PRESET CODE
Technics
TechniSat
Technisson
Technosonic
Technovox
Techview
Techwood
Tecnimagen
Teco
Tedelex
Teiron
Tek
Teknika
Tele System
Electronic
Teleavia
Telecolor
Telecor
Telefunken
Telefusion
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
Teletech
Teleton
Televideon
Teleview
Tempest
Tennessee
Tensai
Tenson
Tera
Tevion
Texet
Texla
ThemeScene
Thomas
Thomson
Thorn
Thorn-Ferguson
10054, 10250, 10051, 10226,
10556, 10650
10556, 11267
10714
10499, 10556
10030, 10217
10847
10250, 10051, 10060, 11163
10556
10051, 10093, 10178, 10092,
10009, 10036, 10218, 10264,
10653, 11040
10009, 10208, 10217, 10418,
10606, 10698, 11537
10009
10820
10054, 10463, 10180, 10150,
10060, 10178, 10092
Tiane
Tiny
TMK
TML
TNCi
Tobishi
Tobo
Tocom
Tokai
Tokaido
Tokyo
Tomashi
Tongguang
Tongtel
Topline
10876
10287, 10343
10017
10037, 10163, 10217, 10218,
10394
10702, 11504, 10821, 10820,
10819, 10714, 10712, 10698,
10625, 10587, 10560, 10498,
10486, 10346, 10343, 10335,
10287, 10109, 10074, 10073,
10037
10037
10037, 10163, 10218, 10264
10037
10037
10009, 10037, 10556
10009, 10037, 10668, 11037
10036, 10217
10163
10037
10009, 10264, 10455
10037
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10371, 10374, 10715, 11037
10009
10030, 10092
10037, 10556, 10648, 10668,
10714, 10808, 11037, 11137,
11248, 11298, 11498, 11556
10009, 10217, 10218, 10374
10780
10887
10047, 10178, 10001, 11904
11447, 10047, 10037, 10109,
10287, 10335, 10343, 10560,
10625
10035, 10036, 10037, 10073,
10074, 10109, 10163, 10264,
10335, 10343, 10361, 10499,
10512
10073, 10335, 10343, 10499
Toshiba
Totevision
Towada
Toyoda
Toyomenka
Trakton
Trans Continens
TRANS-continents
Transonic
Triad
Trident
Trio
Tristar
Triumph
Truetone
Tuntex
TVS
TVTEXT 95
U
Uher
Ultra
Ultravox
Unic Line
United
Universal
Universum
10093, 10817
11269
10236, 10180, 10178
11756
10017
10218
10748, 10009, 10264
10156
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10374, 10668, 11037
11037
10035
10218
10264
10587, 10780
10668, 11037
10154, 11256, 10156, 10150,
11265, 10060, 11145, 10145,
10166, 11037, 11156, 11163,
11164, 11356, 11508, 11556,
11656, 11704, 11945, 11971,
10845, 10821, 10718, 10650,
10618, 10508, 10264, 10217,
10195, 10109, 10070, 10036,
10035, 10011, 10009
10051
10217
10009, 10264, 10371
10178
10217, 10264
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037
10556, 10865
10009, 10037, 10264, 10418,
10455, 10512, 10587, 10698,
10712, 10780
10218, 10556
10217
11498
10218, 10264
10037, 10346, 10556
10250, 10051
10030, 10092, 10009
10463
10556
10037, 10370, 10374, 10418,
10480, 10486
10092
10037, 10163, 10374
10037, 10455
10037, 10587, 10714, 10715,
11037, 11982
10047, 10037
11163, 11037, 10668, 10631,
10618, 10512, 10480, 10418,
10370, 10362, 10361, 10346,
10327, 10264, 10217, 10200,
10195, 10170, 10109, 10074,
10070, 10037, 10036, 10011,
10009
V
Univox
V
V2max
V7 Videoseven
Vector Research
Vestel
Vexa
Victor
Videocon
Videologic
Videologique
Videomac
VideoSystem
Videotechnic
Videoton
Vidikron
Vidtech
Viewpia
Viewsonic
Viking
Viore
Vision
Vizio
Vortec
Voxson
W
Waltham
Wards
Warumaia
Watson
Watt Radio
Waycon
Wega
Wegavox
Weipai
Welltech
Weltblick
Welton
Weltstar
Westinghouse
Wharfedale
White
Westinghouse
Windsor
Windy Sam
Wintel
World
10037, 10163
10864, 10885, 11755, 11756
10865
10880, 11217, 11755
10030
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037,
11163
10009, 10037
10250, 10053, 10036, 10650,
10653
10508
10218
10217, 10218
10009
10037
10217, 10374
10163
10054
10178, 10036
10876
10857, 10864, 10885, 11330,
11578, 11627, 11755
10060
11207
10037, 10217, 10264
10864, 10885, 11755, 11756,
11758
10037
10178, 10037, 10163, 10418
10037, 10109, 10217, 10418,
10443, 10668, 11037
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10236, 10180, 10060, 10178,
10030, 10166, 11347, 11156,
11147, 10866, 10195, 10001,
10037, 10035
10374, 10661
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,
10394, 10668, 10714, 11037
10163
10156
10036, 10037
10009
10009
10714
10217
10178
11037
10000, 10451, 10885, 10889,
11282, 11577
10037, 10556, 10860, 11556
10451, 10236, 10463, 10037,
10623, 10889, 11909
10668, 11037
10556
10714
10451, 10236, 10463, 10180
World-of-Vision
X
Worldview
X-View
Xenius
Xiahua
Y
Xianghai
Xiangyang
Xiangyu
Xihu
Xingfu
Xinghai
XLogic
Xoceco
Xoro
XR-1000
Xrypton
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yapshe
Yingge
Yokan
Yoko
Z
Yonggu
Yorx
Youlanasi
Yousida
Yuhang
Zanussi
Zenith
ZhuHai
10865, 10877, 10880, 11217,
11298
10455
11191
10634, 10661
10009, 10264, 10698, 10773,
10817
10009
10264
10009
10264, 10817
10009
10264
10698, 10860
11064
11196, 11217
10154, 10180, 10171
10037
10030, 10650, 11576
10037, 10217, 10218, 10455
10250
10009
10037
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10370
10009
10030, 10218
10817
10009
10009
10163, 10217, 10264
10047, 10017, 10000, 10093,
10463, 11265, 10812, 10178,
10030, 11145, 10145, 10171,
10092, 10037, 11904, 11909,
11911
10009, 10374
TV/DVD Combination b2, b4
b2
A
B
C
D
Advent
Akai
Akura
Alba
Amstrad
Apex Digital
Audiovox
Axion
Black Diamond
Bush
Centrum
Crown
D-Vision
Denver
11933
11675
11982
11037
11982
11943
11937, 11951, 11952
11937, 11958
11037
10698, 11037, 11900
11037
11037
11982
10587
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
Elfunk
Ferguson
Finlux
Goodmans
Hitachi
JDV
Jensen
KLH
Lenco
Logik
Luker
Luxor
Matsui
Maxim
Medion
Mirror
Naiko
Narita
Panasonic
Philips
Powerpoint
Prima
RCA
Roadstar
Saivod
Samsung
Schneider
SEG
Sova
Stevison
Sylvania
Teac
Technica
Telefunken
Thomson
Transonic
United
Vestel
11037
11037
11556
10587, 11037, 11900
11960
11982
11933
11962
10587
11037
11982
11037
11037
11982
11900
11900
11982
11982
11941
11454, 10556, 11961
10698
11933
11948, 11958
11900
11982
11903
11982
11037
11952
11982
10171
10698
11982
10698
10625
10587
10587, 11037, 11982
11037
Akai
Akura
Alba
Amstrad
Apex Digital
Black Diamond
Broksonic
Bush
Centrum
Citizen
Crown
D-Vision
30695
31367
30695, 30884
31367
30830
30713, 30884
30695
30713, 30884
30713
30695
30713
31367
b4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
R
S
T
U
V
DMTech
Elfunk
Emerson
ESA
Ferguson
Funai
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
Hitachi
Insignia
JDV
JNC
Konka
Logik
Luker
Luxor
Magnavox
Matsui
Maxim
Naiko
Narita
Neovia
Orion
Pacific
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
Saivod
Samsung
Sansui
Schneider
SEG
Sliding
Stevison
Sylvania
Technica
Thomson
Toshiba
United
Universum
Vestel
31271
30713, 30884
30675, 31268
31268
30695, 30713, 30884
31268
30713
30713
30539, 30695
31247
31268
31367
31271
31192
30713, 30884
31367
30713
31268
30713, 30884
31367
31367
31367
31271
30695
30695
31490
30539, 30854, 31260
31022
31367
30899
30695
31367
30713, 30884
31115
31367
30630, 30675, 31268
31367
30551
30695
30713, 30884, 31367
30713
30884
C
D
E
F
Broksonic
Bush
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Emerson
Ferguson
Fidelity
Funai
G
GE
H
I
J
L
M
O
P
Q
R
RCA
S
T
TV/VCR Combination b2, b3, b4
b2
A
B
Aiwa
America Action
Amstrad
Audiovox
Beko
Black Diamond
11904, 11911
10180
10171
10180
10486
11909
GoldStar
Goodmans
Grundig
Harley Davidson
Hinari
Hitachi
Internal
JVC
LG
Lloyd’s
Magnavox
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Orion
Palsonic
Panasonic
Penney
Philips
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
W
Z
Saba
Samsung
Sansui
Schneider
Sears
Sharp
Siemens
Sony
Sylvania
Symphonic
Teac
Technics
Thomas
Thomson
Toshiba
White
Westinghouse
Zenith
10463, 11911
11556
10051
11909
10236, 10463, 11909, 11911
10073, 10625
10171
11904
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,
11922
10037
10374, 11909
10037, 10195, 10556
11904
10036
11904
11909
11923
10178
11904
10054, 11904
10250
10093, 10556, 11917
10463, 11911
11904
10250, 10051
10051
10037, 10556
10250, 10051
10556
11904
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,
11922
10625
11959
10463, 11904, 11911
10037, 10556, 11904
11904
10093, 11917
10037
10000, 11505, 11904
10054
11904
10178, 10171
10556
11904
10625
11971
11909
11904, 11909, 11911
b3
A
Aiwa
20000, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21137
B
C
D
Akai
Alba
America Action
Amstrad
Audiovox
Beko
Bestar
Blue Sky
BPL
Broksonic
Bush
Citizen
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Dantax
E
F
Emerson
G
GE
H
I
J
K
L
M
Ferguson
Fidelity
Firstline
Funai
GoldStar
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
Hanimex
Harley Davidson
Hinari
Hitachi
Hypson
Internal
JBL
JMB
Kambrook
Kneissel
LG
Lloyd’s
Loewe
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Matsui
Medion
Memorex
O
MGA
Mitsubishi
Optimus
Orion
P
Pace
Pacific
20352
20352
20278
20000
20278
20104
20278
20278, 20352, 20742
20046
20002, 20479, 21479
20352, 20742
20278, 21278
20035, 21035
20278, 20637, 21278
20352
20002, 20278, 20479, 20637,
21278, 21479
20000, 20278
20000
20278
20000
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20807, 21035, 21060
20037, 20480, 21237
20278, 20352, 20637
20278, 20742
20081, 20347, 20352, 20742
20352
20000
20352
20000
20037
20278, 20637
20278
20352
20037
20278, 20352
20037, 20480, 21237
20000
20037
20278, 21278
20081, 20000, 21781
20240
20352, 20742
20352
20162, 20037, 21162, 21237,
21262
20240
20048, 20081, 20043, 20807
20162, 21162, 21262
20002, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21479
20352
20742
Palsonic
Panasonic
Penney
Q
R
Philips
Portland
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
RCA
S
T
U
W
Z
Saba
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Saville
Schneider
Sears
SEG
Sharp
Shivaki
Siemens
Sinudyne
Sony
Supra
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tatung
Teac
Technics
Technosonic
Telefunken
Thomas
Thomson
Toshiba
United
White
Westinghouse
Zenith
20000
20035, 20162, 21035, 21162,
21262
20035, 20037, 20240, 21035,
21237
20081
20637
20035, 20162, 21035, 21162
20081
20000
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20807, 21035, 21060
20320
20240, 20432, 21014
20000, 20479, 21479
20240
20352
20081, 20000
20037, 20000, 21237
20637
20037, 20048, 20807
20037
20081
20352
20032, 20000, 21232
20348
20081, 21781
20000
20352
20037, 20000, 20637, 20642
20081
20352
20278
20000
20278
20352, 20432, 20845, 21145
20742
20278, 20637
20000, 20479, 20637, 21479
b4
T
Thomson
30551
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
b2, b3, b4
b2
A
B
E
M
P
R
Akai
Broksonic
Emerson
ESA
Magnavox
Panasonic
RCA
11903
11938
11944
11944
11944
11946, 11947
11953
PRESET CODE
10
S
T
Sharp
Sylvania
Symphonic
Toshiba
11917
11944
11944
11945
b3
S
Sharp
20807
Akai
Emerson
ESA
Magnavox
Panasonic
RCA
Sharp
Superscan
Sylvania
Symphonic
Toshiba
30899
30821
30821
30821
31362, 31462
31132
30630
30821
30821
30821
31045
b4
A
E
M
P
R
S
T
B
VCR
A
A-Mark
ABS
Admiral
Adventura
Aiko
Aim
Aiwa
Akai
Akura
Alba
Alienware
Allegro
Allorgan
Allstar
America Action
American High
Amoisonic
Amstrad
Anam
Anam National
Ansonic
Aristona
ASA
Asha
Astra
Asuka
11
20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,
20046
21972
20060, 20048, 20039, 20047,
20104, 20121, 20209, 20479
20037, 20240, 20000
20278
20278, 20348, 20642
20037, 20032, 20000, 20209,
20041, 20348, 20352, 20479,
20742, 21137
20037, 20240, 20041, 20106,
20315, 20348, 20352, 20642
20041
20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20315, 20348, 20352
21972
20039, 21137
20240
20081
20278
20035, 20081
20479
20000, 20278
20162, 20037, 20240, 20278,
20226, 20480
20162, 20226, 21162, 21562
20000
20081
20037, 20081
20240
20035, 20240
20037, 20081, 20000, 20038
PRESET CODE
C
20081
20278
20037, 20278, 20038
20000
20000, 20352
20037, 20043, 20278, 20642
20000, 20104, 20041, 20278,
Baird
20046, 20106
Basic Line
20104, 20278, 20046
Beaumark
20240
Beko
20104
20035, 20048, 20039, 20000,
Bell & Howell
20104, 20046, 20479
Bestar
20278
Black Diamond
20642
Black Panther
20278
Blaupunkt
20162, 20081, 20226
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,
Blue Sky
20352, 20480, 20642, 20742,
21137
BPL
20046
Brandt
20041, 20320
Brandt Electronique 20041
Brinkmann
20209, 20348
20184, 20121, 20209, 20002,
Broksonic
20348, 20479, 21479
20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,
Bush
20315, 20348, 20352, 20642,
20742
Calix
20037
Candle
20037, 20038
Canon
20035
Capehart
20002
Carena
20081, 20209
Carrefour
20045
Carrera
20240
Carver
20035, 20081
Casio
20000
Cathay
20278
CCE
20278
CGE
20000, 20041
Changhong
20048, 20081
Cimline
20209
Cineral
20278
CineVision
21137
20035, 20037, 20240, 20000,
Citizen
20209, 20278, 20479, 21278
Classic
20037
Clatronic
20000, 21593
Colortyme
20060, 20035, 20045, 20278
Colt
20000
Combitech
20352
Condor
20278
Craig
20037, 20047, 20240
Criterion
20000
Crosley
Crown
Audiolab
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Avis
AVP
Awa
Curtis Mathes
Cybernex
CyberPower
Cyrus
D
Daewoo
Dansai
Dantax
Daytron
De Graaf
Decca
Degraff
Deitron
Dell
Denon
Derwent
Diamant
Diamond
Digitor
DirecTV
Domland
DSE
Dual
E
Dumont
Durabrand
Dynatech
Elbe
Electrohome
Electrophonic
Elin
Elta
Emerald
Emerex
Emerson
ESA
ESC
EuroLine
F
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
20035, 20081, 20000
20037, 20278, 20480
20060, 20035, 20162, 20240,
20000, 20041, 20278, 20432,
21035
20240
21972
20081
20037, 20045, 20104, 20209,
20278, 20046, 20352, 20637,
20642, 21137, 21278
20278
20352
20037, 20278
20048, 20081, 20042, 20104,
20046
20081, 20000, 20067, 20209,
20041, 20352
20048, 20081, 20042, 20104
20278
21972
20081, 20042
20041
20037
20348
20642
20739
20209
20642
20081, 20000, 20041, 20278,
20348
20081, 20000, 20104
20039, 20038, 20642
20240, 20000
20278, 20038
20060, 20037, 20240, 20000,
20043, 20209
20037
20240
20278
20184, 20121
20032
20035, 20037, 20184, 20039,
20240, 20045, 20000, 20121,
20043, 20209, 20002, 20278,
20348, 20479, 20637, 21278,
21479, 21593
21137
20240, 20278
21593
20000, 20041, 20278, 20320,
20348
20240, 20000, 20352, 20432
20037, 20048, 20081, 20000,
20042, 20104, 20043, 20046,
20106, 20226
20081, 20000, 20042, 20104
Firstline
Fisher
G
Flint
Fuji
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Funai
Galaxi
Galaxis
Garrard
Gateway
GE
GEC
Gemini
General
General Technic
Genexxa
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
Gradiente
Graetz
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
H
Haaz
Hanimex
Hanseatic
Haojie
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Headquarter
Hewlett Packard
HI-Q
Hinari
Hisawa
Hischito
Hitachi
Hoeher
Hornyphon
Howard Computers
HP
20037, 20045, 20042, 20043,
20209, 20278, 20348, 20480,
21137
20039, 20047, 20000, 20104,
20046
20209, 20348
20035, 20033
20037, 20045, 20000
20037
20037, 20000, 20278, 21593
20000
20278
20000
21972
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20000, 20226, 20320, 20807,
21035, 21060
20081
20060
20045
20348
20037, 20000, 20104, 20278
20240, 20432, 20614, 21137
20035, 20037, 20039, 20000,
20209, 20278, 20038, 20225,
20226, 20480, 21137, 21237
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20209, 20278, 20348, 20352,
20637, 20642, 20742
20037
20000
20240, 20104, 20041
20035, 20037, 20048, 20081,
20240, 20000, 20042, 20104,
20046, 20226
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20742
20081, 20226, 20320, 20347,
20348, 20352, 20742
20348
20352
20037, 20081, 20209, 20038
20240
20000
20081, 20038
20046
21972
20035, 20047, 20000
20240, 20209, 20041, 20278,
20352
20209, 2035
20045
20035, 20037, 20081, 20240,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20041,
20046, 20089
20278, 20642
20081
21972
21972
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
Hush
Hypson
I
Hytek
iBUYPOWER
Imperial
Ingersol
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
International
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
J
ITT Nokia
ITV
Janeil
JBL
Jensen
JMB
Joyce
JVC
K
Kambrook
Karcher
KEC
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kimari
Kneissel
L
Kodak
Kolin
Kolster
KTV
Kuba
Kuba Electronic
Lenco
LG
Lifetec
Linksys
Lloyd’s
Loewe
Logik
Lumatron
Lunatron
20042, 20739
20739
21972
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20352, 20480
20047, 20000
21972
20000
20240, 20209
20037
20081, 20104
20278, 20637
20037, 20278, 20642
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20348
20037, 20081, 21137
20240, 20104, 20041, 20046,
20106
20240, 20104, 20041, 20106
20037, 20278
20240
20278
20067, 20041
20209, 20348, 20352, 20742
20000
20184, 20081, 20045, 20067,
20041, 21162
20037
20081, 20278, 20642
20037, 20278
20037, 20209, 20278, 20106,
20315, 20348, 20642
20067, 20041, 20038, 20046
20000
20047
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,
20352
20035, 20037
20043, 20041
20209
20000
20047
20047
20278
20037, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20042, 20209, 20278, 20038,
20225, 20480, 21137, 21237
20209, 20348
21972
20240, 20000, 20038
21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,
21262, 21562
20240, 20000, 20209, 20106
20278, 21137
21137
Luxor
M
LXI
M Electronic
Magnadyne
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Magnum
Manesth
Marantz
Mark
Marta
Mastec
Master’s
Matsui
Matsushita
Media Center PC
Mediator
Medion
MEI
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MGA
MGN Technology
Micormay
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Midland
Migros
Mind
Minolta
Mitsubishi
N
Motorola
MTC
MTX
Multitec
Multitech
Murphy
Myryad
NAD
Naiko
NAP
National
20048, 20047, 20104, 20043,
20046, 20106, 20315
20037, 20000, 20042, 20067
20037, 20240, 20000, 20038
20081
20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,
21278
20035, 20037, 20048, 20039,
20081, 20240, 20000, 20226,
20618, 20642, 21593, 21781
20240
20642
20081, 20045, 20209
20035, 20081, 20209, 20038
20000, 20278
20037
20642
20278
20037, 20240, 20209, 20278,
20348, 20352, 20742
20035, 20162, 20081, 20226,
21162
21972
20081
20209, 20348, 20352, 20642
20035
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20039, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20209, 20278, 20046,
20348, 20479, 21162, 21237,
21262
20081
21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,
20226, 20347, 20836, 21162,
21262, 21562
20060, 20240, 20043
20240
20348
20209
21972
20240
20000
21972
20042
20060, 20048, 20047, 20081,
20000, 20042, 20067, 20043,
20041, 20480, 20642, 20807
20035, 20048
20240, 20000
20000
20037
20039, 20000
20000
20081
20240, 20104
20348, 20642
20039
20226
Nebula Electronics
NEC
Neckermann
Nesco
Neufunk
Newave
Nikkai
Nikko
Nikkodo
Nishi
Niveus Media
Noblex
Nokia
Nordmende
Northgate
Nu-Tec
O
Oceanic
Okano
Olympus
Onimax
Onkyo
Optimus
Orion
P
Orson
Osaki
Otake
Otto Versand
Pace
Pacific
Packard Bell
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panasonic
Pathe Cinema
Pathe Marconi
Penney
Pentax
Perdio
Philco
20033
20035, 20037, 20048, 20104,
20067, 20041, 20278, 20038,
21137
20081, 20041
20000
20209
20037
20278
20037, 20278
20037, 20278
20240
21972
20240
20048, 20081, 20240, 20042,
20104, 20041, 20278, 20046,
20106, 20315
20067, 20041, 20320
21972
20209
20048, 20081, 20000, 20104,
20041, 20046, 20106
20209, 20278, 20315, 20348
20035, 20162, 20104, 20226
20642
20222
21062, 20035, 20162, 20037,
20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20432, 21162, 21262
20184, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20121, 20209, 20002, 20278,
20348, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21479
20000
20037, 20000
20209
20081
20352
20000, 20348, 20642, 20742
21972
20037, 20209, 20041, 20348
20000, 20642
20035
21062, 20035, 20162, 20000,
20225, 20226, 20614, 20616,
20836, 21035, 21162, 21262,
21562
20043
20041
20035, 20162, 20037, 20047,
20081, 20240, 20000, 20042,
20067, 20038, 21035, 21237
20042
20000, 20209
20035, 20081, 20000, 20209,
20038, 20226, 20479
Philips
Q
Phoenix
Phonola
Pilot
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Portland
Presidian
Prinz
Profitronic
Proline
Proscan
Prosco
Prosonic
Protec
Protech
ProVision
Pulsar
Pulser
Pye
Qisheng
Quarter
Quartz
Quasar
R
Quelle
Radialva
Radiola
Radionette
RadioShack
Radix
Randex
Rank
Rank Arena
RCA
Realistic
Reoc
ReplayTV
Rex
Ricavision
Rio
Roadstar
S
Runco
Saba
Saisho
Salora
20035, 20162, 20048, 20081,
20045, 20000, 20209, 20226,
20616, 20618, 20739, 21081,
21181
20278
20081
20037
20162, 20081, 20042, 20067
20081
20278, 20637
21593
20000
20081, 20240
20000, 20278, 20320, 20642
20060, 21060
20278
20209, 20278
20000
20081
20278
20039, 20240, 20278
20240
20081, 20000
20060
20046
20035, 20047, 20046
20035, 20162, 20002, 20278,
20226, 21035, 21162
20081
20037, 20048, 20081
20081
20037, 21137
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20046, 21162
20037
20037
20041
20041
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20106,
20226, 20320, 20807, 20880,
21035, 21060
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20121, 20278, 20046, 21162
20348
20614, 20616
20041
21972
21137
20037, 20081, 20240, 20278,
20038, 20742
20039
20041, 20278, 20320
20209, 20348
20104, 20043, 20046, 20106
Sampo
Samsung
Samtron
Sanky
Sansei
Sansui
Sanyo
Saville
SBR
ScanSonic
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scott
Sears
Seaway
SEG
SEI
Sei-Sinudyne
Seleco
Semp
Sentra
Sharp
Shinco
Shintom
Shivaki
Shogun
Siemens
Siera
Signature
Silva
Silver
SilverCrest
Singer
Sinudyne
Smaragd
Sonic Blue
Sonographe
Sonolor
Sontec
Sonwa
Sony
20037, 20048
20060, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20038, 20432, 20739, 21014
20240
20048, 20039
20048
20240, 20000, 20067, 20209,
20041, 20002, 20106, 20348,
20479, 21479
20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20067, 20209, 20046,
20348, 20479, 21137
20240, 20278, 20352
20081
20240
20000, 20104, 20041, 20106,
20315, 20348
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20042, 20278, 20348, 20352,
20642, 21137
20184, 20045, 20121, 20043
20060, 20035, 20162, 20037,
20048, 20039, 20047, 20033,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20104,
20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,
21237, 20046
20278
20081, 20240, 20278, 20637,
20642
20081
20081
20037, 20041
20045
20278
20037, 20048, 20047, 20032,
20000, 20209, 20807
20000
20039, 20240, 20000, 20104
20037
20240
20037, 20081, 20104, 20046,
20320, 20347
20081
20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,
20000, 20046, 20479
20037
20278
20642
20037, 20240, 20045, 20348
20081, 20209, 20352
20348
20614, 20616, 21137
20046
20048, 20046
20037, 20278
20642
20035, 20048, 20047, 20032,
20033, 20000, 20067, 20046,
20106, 20226, 20636, 21232,
21972
Soundmaster
Soundwave
Stack 9
Standard
Stern
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Supra
Susumu
SV2000
SVA
Sylvania
T
Symphonic
Systemax
T+A
Tagar Systems
Taisho
Tandberg
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
Tchibo
TCM
Teac
Technics
TechniSat
Technosonic
Teco
Tedelex
Teknika
Teleavia
Telecorder
Telefunken
Telerent
Telestar
Teletech
Tensai
Tevion
Texet
Thomas
Thomson
Thorn
Tisonic
Tivo
TMK
20000
20037, 20209, 20348
21972
20278
20278
20042
20209, 20278, 20348
20000
20000
20037, 20278, 20348
20037
20000
20000
20035, 20081, 20000, 20043,
21593, 21781
20240, 20000, 20002, 21593
21972
20162
21972
20209
20278
20000, 20104
20037, 20048, 20081, 20240,
20000
20048, 20081, 20045, 20000,
20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,
20348, 20352
20348
20348
20037, 20000, 20067, 20041,
20278, 20637, 20642, 21593
20035, 20162, 20037, 20081,
20000, 20226, 21162
20348
20352
20035, 20037, 20048, 20041,
20038
20037, 20209, 20348, 20642
20035, 20037, 20000
20041
20240
20209, 20041, 20278, 20320,
20642
20226
20037
20000, 20278
20037, 20000, 20278
20209, 20348, 20479, 20642
20278
20000, 20002
20060, 20067, 20041, 20278,
20320
20037, 20104, 20041, 20320
20278
20618, 20636, 20739, 21996
20240, 20000
PRESET CODE
12
TNIX
Tocom
Tokai
Topline
Toshiba
U
Tosonic
Totevision
Touch
Toyoda
Tradex
Triad
Trix
Uher
Ultra
Ultravox
Unitech
United
Universum
V
W
X
Y
Z
Vector
Vector Research
Victor
Video Concepts
Video Technic
Videomagic
Videosonic
Viewsonic
Villain
Voodoo
Wards
Watson
Weltblick
Wharfedale
White
Westinghouse
World
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yoko
Zenith
ZT Group
ZX
20037
20240
20037, 20104, 20041
20348
20081, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20042, 20067, 20043, 20209,
20041, 20352, 20432, 20742,
20845, 21008, 21145, 21972,
21996
20278
20037, 20240
21972
20278
20081
20278
20037
20240
20045, 20278
20278
20240
20348, 20742, 21593
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20209, 20106, 20348,
21137
20045
20184, 20038
20067, 20041
20045
20000
20037
20240, 20000
21972
20000
21972
20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,
20039, 20047, 20081, 20033,
20240, 20045, 20000, 20042,
20043, 20041, 20038, 20046,
20479
20081, 20352, 20642
20037
20642
20000, 20209, 20278, 20479,
20637
20209, 20002, 20348, 20479
20035, 20240, 20000
20041, 20038
20278
20037, 20240
20037, 20039, 20033, 20000,
20209, 20041, 20278, 20479,
20637, 21137, 21479
21972
20209, 20348, 20352
PVR b3
A
C
D
G
H
I
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
V
Z
ABS
Alienware
CyberPower
Dell
DirecTV
Gateway
Go Video
Hewlett Packard
Howard Computers
HP
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
Hush
iBUYPOWER
Linksys
Media Center PC
Microsoft
Mind
Niveus Media
Northgate
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
ReplayTV
Samsung
Sonic Blue
Sony
Stack 9
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Tivo
Toshiba
Touch
Viewsonic
Voodoo
ZT Group
A
3D LAB
4Kus
A-Trend
Acoustic Solutions
AEG
AFK
Aim
Airis
Aiwa
13
PRESET CODE
21972
21972
21972
21972
20739
21972
20614
21972
21972
21972
Akashi
AKI
Akira
Akura
Alba
Alco
Alize
All-Tel
Allegro
Altacom
Amitech
Amoi
Amphion Media
Works
Amstrad
AMW
Anam
Ansonic
20739
20739
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
20614, 20616
20618, 20739
20880
20614, 20616
20739
20614, 20616
20636, 21972
21972
21972
21972
20618, 20636, 20739
21008, 21972, 21996
21972
21972
21972
21972
DVD Player
1
Akai
30503, 30539
31158
30714
30713, 30730, 31228
30770, 30788, 30790, 31923
31051, 31152, 31923
30672, 30699, 30833
30672, 31005, 31224, 31250,
31321, 31345
30533, 30641
Apex Digital
B
Aristona
Arrgo
ASCOMTEC
Asono
Aspire Digital
Atacom
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Audioworld
Autovox
Auvio
Awa
Axion
Base
Basic Line
Baze
BBK
Beep
Bellagio
Belson
Binatone
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blu:sens
Blue Nova
International
Blue Parade
30690, 30695, 30705, 30770,
30788, 30790, 30884, 30898,
30899, 31115, 31205, 31233,
31695
30838
31005
30699, 31321
30898, 31051, 31140, 31233,
31367
30672, 30539, 30717, 30695,
30699, 30713, 30730, 30783,
30884, 31140, 31530, 31695
30790
31151
31451
30869
31224
30784, 30770, 30850
30852
C
30872
30713, 30770, 31151, 31367
30872
31913
30759, 30774, 30831
30533, 30672, 30717, 30755,
30794, 30796, 30797, 30830,
31004, 31020, 31056, 31061
30539, 30646
31023
31923
31224
31168
31224
30690, 31923
30717, 30790
30790
30713
30843
30730, 30872
30730
31451
30713
30898
30862, 31224
31163
31004
31086, 31923
31923
30713, 30833, 30884
30717
31233, 31321
31321
30571
30672, 30651, 30695, 30699,
30713, 30790, 30843, 31423
Boghe
31004
Boman
30783, 30898, 31005
Bose
32023
Brainwave
30770, 31115
Brandt
30503, 30651, 30551
Broksonic
30695
30672, 30717, 30690, 30699,
30713, 30723, 30730, 30831,
Bush
30833, 30884, 31051, 31140,
31483, 31695, 31832
Byd:sign
30872
C-Tech
30798, 31152
California Audio Labs 30490
Cambridge Audio
30751, 31109
Cambridge
30690
Soundworks
Campomatic Digital 31051
Cat
30699, 30789, 31421, 31923
CCE
30730
Celestial
31020
cello
31730
Centrex
30672, 31004
30713, 30789, 31005, 31227,
Centrum
31923
CGV
30751, 31115
Changhong
30627, 31061
Cinea
30831, 30841
Cinetec
30713, 30872
cineULTRA
30699
CineVision
30833, 30869, 31483
Citizen
30695
Clairtone
30571
Classic
30730, 31730
Clatronic
30672, 30675, 30788, 31233
Clayton
30713
30730, 30852, 31086, 31321,
Coby
31923
Codex
31233
Commax
31321
Conia
30672, 30852, 31321
Contel
30788
Continental Edison 30831, 30872
Craig
30831
Creative
30503, 30539
Crown
30690, 30713, 30770, 31115
Crypto
31228
Curtis Mathes
31087
Cybercom
30831
30714, 30816, 30874, 31023,
CyberHome
31024, 31117, 31129, 31502
Cytron
30651, 30705, 30774, 31347
D-Vision
31115, 31367
Daenyx
30872
Blue Sky
D
Daewoo
Dalton
Dansai
Dantax
Daytek
Dayton
DCE
Decca
Denon
Denver
Denzel
Desay
Dgtec
Diamond
Digihome
DigiLogic
digiRED
Digitech
Digitor
Digitrex
DiK
Dinamic
Disney
DiViDo
DK Digital
DMTech
Dragon
DreamX
DSE
Dual
E
Durabrand
DVD2000
DVX
E:max
EagleTec
eBench
ECC
Eclipse
Elfunk
Elin
Elite
Ellion
Elta
Eltax
Emerson
Enterprise
30490, 30784, 30705, 30714,
30770, 30833, 30869, 30872,
31172, 31483, 31906
31036
30770, 30783, 31115, 31695
30539, 30713, 30723, 30790
30872, 31005
30872
30831
30770, 31115
30490, 30634, 31634,
[32134]z
30672, 30699, 30788, 30898,
31056, 31104, 31321, 31923
30665
30843, 31212
30672
30651, 30751, 30768, 30790
30713
30713
30717
31832
30651, 30690, 30833, 31005,
31423
30672, 31004, 31056
30831
30788
30675, 30831, 31270
30705
30831
30783, 31271
30831
31151
30833, 31152, 31730
30651, 30665, 30675, 30713,
30730, 30783, 30790, 30831,
31023
30713, 30831, 31023, 31502
30521
30768
31233, 31321
30714
31152
30730
30723, 30751
30713, 30850, 30884
30770
31152
30850, 31421
30672, 30690, 30770, 30788,
30850, 31051, 31115, 31151,
31233
31233, 31321
30591, 30675, 30705, 30821,
31268
30591
F
Entivo
Enzer
ESA
EuroLine
Fenner
Ferguson
Finlux
Firstline
G
Fisher
Funai
Fusion
Gateway
GE
General Electric
Germatic
Global Link
Global Solutions
Global Sphere
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GP Audio
GPX
Gradiente
Graetz
Gran Prix
Grandin
Greenhill
Grundig
Grunkel
H
H&B
Haaz
Haier
Hanseatic
Harman/Kardon
HCM
HDT
HE
Henss
HiMAX
Hitachi
Hiteker
Hoeher
30503, 30539
30784, 30770, 31228
30821, 31268
30675, 30788, 31115, 31233
30651
30651, 30695, 30713, 30884,
30898, 31695, 31730
30672, 30591, 30741, 30751,
30770, 30783
30651, 30713, 30843, 30869,
31530
30670
30675, 30695, 31268
30862
31158
30522, 30815, 30717
30717
31051
31224
30768
31152
30573, 30744, 30717, 30715,
30741, 30783, 30833, 30869,
31044, 31075, 31099, 31158,
31483, 31730
30591, 30741, 30869
30651, 30690, 30713, 30723,
30730, 30783, 30790, 30833,
31004, 31140, 31423, 31530,
31730, 31923
31140
30699, 30741
30490, 30651
30665
30831, 30898
30713, 31233
30717
30539, 30651, 30551, 30670,
30686, 30695, 30705, 30713,
30775, 30790, 31004, 31036,
31695, 31730, 31832, 31920
30770, 30790, 30831
30713, 30841, 30850, 31233,
31421
30751, 31152
30843
30741, 30783, 30790
30582, 30702
30788
30705
30730, 31163, 31923
30713
30843
30573, 30664, 30665, 30713,
31247, 31920
30672, 31923
30651, 30713, 30831, 31004,
31224
I
J
K
L
Home Electronics
Home Tech Industries
Hoyo
Humax
Hyundai
iLo
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Insignia
Integra
Irradio
IRT
ISP
Jamo
Jaton
JBL
JDB
JDV
Jeken
Jepssen
JMB
JNC
JSI
30730, 30770
31224
30665
30646
30783, 30850, 31061, 31228
31348
30788
31023
30839, 30717
30713
31268
30571, 30627, 31634
30869, 31115, 31224, 31233
30783
30695
31036
30665
30702
30730
31367
30699
31250
30695
30672, 31271
31423
30503, 30539, 30558, 30623,
JVC
30867, 31164, 31597, 31860
jWin
31051
Kansas Technologies 31233, 31530
Karcher
30783
Kawasaki
30790
Kendo
30672, 30699, 30713, 30831
Kennex
30713, 30770, 30898
Kenwood
30490, 30534
Kiiro
30770
Kiss
30665, 30841, 31523
KLH
30815, 30717, 30790, 31020
Kloss
30533
Koda
31230
Konka
31192
Koss
30651, 31061, 31423
Kreisen
31421
KXD
31321, 31923
Lasonic
30627, 30798, 30789
Lawson
30768
Lecson
31533
Leiker
30872
30651, 30699, 30713, 30770,
Lenco
30774
Lenoir
31228
Lenoxx
30690, 30838
Lexia
30699, 30768
LG
Lifetec
Limit
LiteOn
Lodos
Loewe
Logik
Logix
Luker
Lumatron
M
Lunatron
Luxman
Luxor
Magnasonic
Magnat
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
Marquant
Matsui
Maxdorf
Maxent
Maxim
Maya
MBO
McIntosh
MDS
Mecotek
Medion
MEI
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MiCO
Micromaxx
Micromedia
Micromega
Microsoft
Microstar
Minato
Minax
Minerva
Minoka
Mintek
Mirror
30591, 30741, 30790, 30869,
31906
30651, 30831, 31347
30768, 31104
31058, 31158
30713
30539, 30511, 30741, 30885
30713, 30884
30705, 30783
31367
30695, 30705, 30713, 30741,
30833, 31115, 31321, 31832
30741
30573
30713, 31004, 31695, 31730
30651, 30675
31923
30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,
30713, 30821, 30885, 31140,
31268
30723
31345
30705, 30713
30503, 30539, 30675
30713
30770
30672, 30651, 30695, 30713,
30884, 31004, 31695, 31730
30788
31347
30713, 30872, 31367
31345
30690, 30730, 31730
31533
30713
30770
30651, 30630, 30774, 30783,
30831, 31006, 31270, 31345,
31347, 31423
30790
30690, 30695, 30831, 31270
30690
30525, 30571, 30713
30723, 30751, 31223
31695
30503, 30539
30539, 31005
30522, 31708
30831
30752
30713
30705
30770, 31115
30839, 30717
30752
N
O
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
MPX
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
NAD
Naiko
Narita
NEC
Neovia
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
NexxTech
Nikkai
Nintaus
Niro
Norcent
Nordmende
Noriko
Nova
Nowa
Nu-Tec
Okano
Olidata
Omni
P
Onix
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
Ormond
P&B
Pacific
Packard Bell
Palladium
Palsonic
Panasonic
Panda
peeKTon
Philco
Philips
31521, 30521, 30713, 31403
30770, 31451
30665
30843
30730, 31730
30651, 30751, 31223
30831
30741
30770, 31004, 31367
31367
30741, 30869, 31404
31271
30717
30665
30770, 30831, 31197
31402
31923
31051, 31202
32024
30872, 31923
30774, 30831
30752
31923
30843
31228
30752
30672
30690, 30833, 30838, 30862,
31104, 31832
30838
30503, 30627
31158
31224
30843
30525, 30571
30872
30695, 31233, 31695
30651
30713
31451
30695, 30713, 30759, 30768,
30790, 30831
30831
30695, 30713, 31906, 31920
30672, 30852, 31056, 31321
30503, 30490, 30571, 30703,
31362, 31462, 31490, 31579,
31762, 31834, 31905, 31908
30717, 30789, 31203
30898, 31224
30690, 30862
30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,
30854, 30885, 31158, 31260,
31267, 31340, 31354
Philo
Phonotrend
PianoDisc
Pioneer
Plu2
Pointer
Polaroid
Polk Audio
Portland
Powerpoint
Presidian
Prima
Prinz
Prism
Pro2
ProCaster
Proceed
Proline
Proscan
Proson
Prosonic
ProVision
Q
R
Pye
QONIX
Qwestar
Radionette
RadioShack
Raite
RCA
Realistic
REC
Redstar
Relisys
Reoc
Revoy
Rex
Richmond
Rio
Roadstar
S
Rocksonic
Ronin
Rotel
Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
31345
30699
31024
30490, 30525, 30571, 30631,
31965
30850
30784
31020, 31061, 31086
30539
30770
30872, 31005
30675
31228
30831
30705, 30831
31345
31004
30672
30672, 30651, 30686, 30833,
31004, 31483
30522
30713
30699, 30752
30699, 30730, 31163, 31321,
31923
30539, 30646
31051
30651
30741, 30869, 31906, 32024
30571
30665
30522, 30571, 30717, 30790,
30822, 31022, 31132, 31769,
31913, 31965
30571
30490
30759, 30763, 30770, 30788,
30898, 31345, 31923
31347
30752, 30768
30699, 30841
30838
31233
30869
30672, 30690, 30699, 30713,
30730, 30833, 30898, 31051,
31227
30789
30872
30558, 30623
30717, 30759, 30872, 31004
30789
30651, 3055
30798
30759, 30831, 31367
PRESET CODE
14
Salora
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Scan
ScanMagic
ScanSonic
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Schwaiger
Scientific Labs
Scott
Seeltech
SEG
Sensory Science
Shanghai
Sharp
Sharper Image
Sherwood
Shinco
Shinsonic
Siemssen
Sigmatek
Siltex
Silva
Silva Schneider
SilverCrest
Simaudio
Singer
Sistemas
Skantic
Skymaster
Skyworth
Sliding
Slim Art
SM Electronic
Smart
Sonai
Sonashi
Sonic Blue
Sony
Sound Color
Soundmaster
15
30741
30752, 31321, 31347
30490, 30573, 30744, 30199,
30820, 30899, 31044, 31075,
31635, 31932
30784, 30695, 30751, 30763,
30768, 31051, 31228, 31230,
31695, 31832
30670, 30675, 30695, 30713,
30873, 31228
30705, 30850
30730, 31730
31695
30770, 30788, 31115, 31151
30539, 30646, 30651, 30705,
30713, 30774, 30783, 30788,
30790, 30831, 30869, 31367
30752
30768
30672, 30651, 31005, 31036,
31233, 31423
31224, 31451
30798, 30665, 30713, 30763,
30872, 30884, 31483, 31530
31158
30672
30630, 30675, 30713, 30752,
31256, 32015, 32024
31117
30717, 30741, 30770
30717
30533, 30839
31382
31005, 31224
31224
30788, 30898
30831, 30898
31152
30885
30690, 30751, 30768
30672
30539, 30713
30730, 30768
30898
31115
30784
30690, 30730, 30768, 31152
30705, 30713
30755
30831
30573, 30715, 30783, 30869,
31099
30533, 31533, 30864, 30573,
30630, 30772, 31033, 31070,
31431, 31433, 31536, 31633,
31769, 31981, 32043
31233
30768
PRESET CODE
Soundmax
Soundwave
Spectra
Standard
T
Star Clusters
Starlogic
Starmedia
Stevison
Strong
Sunkai
Sunstech
Sunwood
Superscan
Supervision
SVA
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synn
Tandberg
Tangent
Targa
Tatung
Tchibo
TCL
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technica
Technics
Technika
Technisson
Technosonic
Techwood
Tedelex
Telefunken
Teletech
Tensai
Tevion
Theta Digital
Thomson
Tivo
Tokai
Tom-Tec
Top Suxess
Toshiba
TRANS-continents
Transonic
30768
30783
30872
30651, 30768, 30788, 30831,
30898
31152, 31227
31005
31005, 31224
31367
30713
30770, 30850
30831
30788, 30898
30821
30768, 31152
30672, 30717, 30752, 31105
30630, 30675, 30821, 31268
30675, 30821, 31268
30768
30713, 31695
31321
31227
30770, 31695
30741
31180
30741, 30790
30571, 30717, 30675, 30741,
30759, 30768, 30790, 30833,
31006, 31197, 31227
30898
31367, 31695
30490, 30703, 31905
30770, 30831, 31115, 31695
31115
30730, 31051, 31115
30713, 31530
30690, 30768, 31004, 31228
30789, 30790, 30833, 31483,
31832, 31923
30713, 30768
30651, 30690, 30770
30651, 30798, 30768, 30833,
30898, 31036, 31227, 31347,
31382, 31483, 31730, 31923
30571
30522, 30511, 30551
31503
30784, 30665, 30788, 30790,
30898
30789
31224
30503, 30573, 30539, 30695,
31045, 31154, 31503, 31510,
31769
30831, 30872, 31321, 31327
30730
U
Tredex
TruVision
Tsinghua Tongfang
TSM
Umax
Unimax
United
Universum
V
W
Uptek
upXus
Urban Concepts
US Logic
Venturer
Vestel
Victor
Vieta
Viewmaster
Voxson
Vtrek
Waitec
Walkvision
Waltham
Welkin
Wellington
Weltstar
Wesder
Wharfedale
X
Y
Wilson
Windsor
Windy Sam
WIZE
Woxter
Xbox
Xenius
XLogic
XMS
Xoro
Yakumo
Yamada
Yamaha
Yamakawa
Yukai
Z
Zenith
Zeus
30843
31451
31205
31224
30690, 31151
30770
30675, 30695, 30699, 30713,
30730, 30788, 30884, 31115,
31152, 31228, 31367, 31832
30591, 30713, 30741, 30790,
30869, 31227, 31530, 31913
30763
31345
30503, 30539
30839
30790
30713, 30884, 31530
31597
30705
30862, 31224
30690, 30730, 30774, 30831
31228
31151, 31224, 31233
30717
31530
30831
30713
30713
30699
30686, 30751, 30752, 30790,
31832
30831, 31233
30713
30573
31115
31005, 31151, 31224
30522, 31708
30790
30768, 31152, 31228
30770, 30788
31183, 31250
31004, 31056
30872, 31004, 31056, 31151,
31158
30490, 30539, 30646, 30545,
31354
30665, 30872, 31104
30730, 31730
30503, 30591, 30741, 30869,
31906
30784
DVD Recorder
1
4Kus
31158
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Airis
Akira
Alba
Apex Digital
Aristona
Aspire Digital
Belson
Cat
cello
Centrum
Classic
Coby
Commax
Conia
CyberHome
Cytron
Denon
Denver
Digitrex
DSE
Durabrand
E:max
Ellion
Eltax
Emerson
Ferguson
Firstline
Funai
Gateway
Go Video
Goodmans
GPX
Grundig
H&B
Humax
iLo
JVC
Kansas Technologies
Kreisen
KXD
LG
Lifetec
LiteOn
Loewe
Lumatron
Luxor
Magnavox
Matsui
Maxent
MBO
Medion
MiCO
31321
31321
31530
31056
30646
31168
31086
31421
31730
31227
31730
31086
31321
31321
31129, 31502
31347
30490
31056
31056
31730
31502
31321
31421
31321
30675
31730
31530
30675
31158
30741, 31158, 31730
31530, 31730
30741
31730
31421
30646
31348
31164, 31597
31530
31421
31321
30741
31347
31158
30741
31321
31730
30646, 30675
31730
31347
31730
31347
30751
N
O
P
R
S
Mitsubishi
Mustek
NEC
Oopla
Palsonic
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polaroid
ProVision
Pye
RCA
Relisys
Roadstar
Sampo
Samsung
ScanMagic
Schneider
SEG
Sensory Science
Sharp
Sony
T
U
V
W
Y
Z
Star Clusters
Sylvania
Tangent
Targa
Teac
Techwood
Tevion
Thomson
Toshiba
Universum
Vestel
Victor
Waltham
Yakumo
Yamada
Yamaha
Yukai
Zenith
31403
31730
31404
31158
31056, 31321
30490, 31579
30646, 31158
30631
31086
31321
30646
30522
31347
31227
31347
30490, 31635
31730
30646
31530
31158
30630, 30675
31033, 31070, 31431, 31433,
31536
31227
30675
31321
31227
31227
31530
31227, 31347, 31730
30551
31510
31227, 31530
31530
31597
31530
31056
31056, 31158
30646
31730
30741
DVD preset codes / Codes préréglés DVD
e
Model No. /
Modéle numéro
32134 (default / défaut)
DVD-555
DVD-755
DVD-900
DVD-910
DVD-955
DVD-1000
DVD-1200
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-1930CI
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800g
DVD-2900
DVD-2910
DVD-2930CI
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-3930CI
DVD-5900
DVD-5910
DVD-9000
DVM-715
DVM-1800
DVM-1805
DVM-1815
DVM-2815
DVM-4800
30490
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
[ ]z: Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory.
: Les codes préréglés différent en fonctiom des livraison de l’usine.
b1:These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.
:Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode SAT/CBL.
b2:These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.
:Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode TV.
b3:These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode.
:Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode VCR.
b4:These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.
:Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode DVD.
PRESET CODE
16
www.denon.com
Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in Japan 00D 511 4654 101A